JP2021166875A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly amusing performance.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 can execute a plurality of reliability-suggestive performances for suggesting reliability to a jackpot. The reliability-suggestive performance includes for example a performance executable during display of a decorative performance in a first mode and a performance executable during display of a decorative pattern in a second mode. Reliability-suggestive performances executable during display of a decorative pattern in a first mode are, for example, a retention icon change performance, an icon change performance concerned, a pseudo continuation performance, an operation promotion performance, a background performance, a chance pattern performance, a pattern change performance, and the like. Reliability-suggestive performances executable during display of a decorative pattern in a second mode are, for example, an icon change performance concerned, a title indication, an operation promotion performance, a cut-in, and the like.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing an effect based on a determination as to whether or not to execute a special game.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize at a predetermined starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. Some of these types of gaming machines can perform a warning effect (for example, a premier effect) that announces that the jackpot game will be executed prior to being notified that the jackpot game has been determined to be executed. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-96091

By the way, the production performed by the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily highly entertaining, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the entertainingness.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a highly entertaining effect.

The present invention has adopted the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.
That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. The pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern of the identification information based on the result of the determination. The effect control means includes a selection means for selecting from a plurality of types of variation patterns including the variation pattern and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means can execute the pre-effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. , It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game is executed at any of a plurality of timings. The notice effect includes a first notice effect executed when the corresponding display is in a normal mode and a second notice effect executed when the corresponding display is in a special mode. When the variation pattern is selected, the first advance notice effect can be executed, and when the second variation pattern is selected, the first advance notice effect and the second advance notice effect can be executed, and the special game When it is determined that the first variation pattern is executed, the second variation pattern is more likely to be selected than the first variation pattern, and when the pre-effect is executed, the notice is higher than when the pre-effect is not executed. The production is easy to execute.

According to the present invention, it is possible to carry out a highly interesting production.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 Top view showing a part of the gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory drawing for explaining game state Explanatory drawing for explaining various random numbers used for special symbol judgment Flow diagram exemplifying the flow of production in the normal game state Flow diagram exemplifying the flow of production in the probabilistic game state Explanatory drawing for explaining the decorativeness of a decorative pattern Screen view showing a concrete example of the production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 1) Screen view showing a concrete example of the production that develops into SPSP reach via normal reach (Part 2) A time chart showing a specific example of the display mode of the decorative pattern when the promotion effect is executed. Screen view showing a specific example of character SP reach Screen view showing a specific example of a bumping effect in a normal game state Screen diagram showing a specific example of battle reach in a probabilistic game state Screen view showing a specific example of a bumping effect in a probabilistic game state Explanatory drawing for explaining the variation pattern selection table used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining the variation pattern selection table used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a probability variation game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in a normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the probabilistic game state Explanatory drawing for explaining various jackpot notices Screen view showing a concrete example of premier character production Screen view showing a specific example of rainbow-colored title display Screen diagram showing specific examples of blue title display and red title display Screen view showing a specific example of rainbow-colored character display Screen view showing a specific example of cut-in performed according to the operation Schematic front view of the gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one notification Screen diagram exemplifying how the premier character production is performed multiple times within the same fluctuation Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table Time chart showing specific examples of production in the normal game state Time chart showing specific examples of production in the probabilistic game state Explanatory drawing exemplifying the jackpot reliability of the hold icon Screen diagram exemplifying a customer waiting menu screen Explanatory drawing for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set. A block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the game control board 100. Detailed flowchart of switch processing in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 37. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 37. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS. 38 and 39 Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41 Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. 41. Detailed flowchart of the stopped processing in step S319 of FIG. 41 A flowchart showing an example of a game state setting process executed at the end of a jackpot game on the game control board 100. Flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the effect control board 130 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 47. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. 47. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. 49. Detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. 49. Detailed flowchart of reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the image / acoustic control board 140. Detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S41 of FIG. 53. Screen view showing a concrete example of the first mission production Screen view showing a concrete example of the second mission production An explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal gaming state in the second embodiment. Hold icon A time chart showing specific examples of the period during which the change effect can be executed and the period during which it cannot be executed. Explanatory drawing for explaining display mode of the icon at the time of big hit Explanatory drawing for explaining display mode of the icon at the time of loss A time chart showing specific examples of the period during which the icon change effect can be executed and the period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed. Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example of a series of productions in a pseudo-continuous production Explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production and the reliability Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example of a series of productions when a background effect is executed Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example of an operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of a big hit. Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of loss. Time chart for explaining chance eye production and design change production Explanatory drawing for explaining the relationship between reliability suggestion effects A screen view illustrating how a background effect and a normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. A screen view illustrating how the icon change effect (big hit notice), background effect, and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. A screen view illustrating how the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. A screen view illustrating how the icon change effect (big hit notice), background effect, and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. A screen view illustrating how the chance eye effect and the pattern change effect are executed in the normal mode A. A screen view illustrating how the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A. Explanatory drawing for explaining mode of SPSP reach (battle production) Explanatory drawing for explaining a modification of the additional display which is displayed by being added to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. Explanatory drawing for explaining modification of the decorative symbol of 1st aspect and 2nd aspect

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Rough configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with accessories related to winning and determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 into which the game ball can flow down. Has been done.

When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game ball stored in the upper plate 28 is guided to a launching device (not shown), and the game is played with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Fired into region 10. A game nail, a windmill, or the like (not shown) is provided in the game area 10, and the launched game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10 and comes into contact with the game nail, the windmill, or the like. The game area 10 is dropped along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the stop button 22.

The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for storing prize balls is provided. When the player operates the eject button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls collected in the lower plate 29 fall into a box (not shown) arranged below the lower plate 29. The upper plate 28 and the lower plate 29 may be composed of one plate.

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the handle 20 is kept rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the handle 20 is maintained at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two ordinary winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passage path of the left-handed game ball as accessories related to winning and judgment. Has been done. In addition, in the passage path of the right-handed game ball, the second start opening 12, the large winning opening 13, the two ordinary winning openings 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip are used as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 is provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any of the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And may win a prize. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 is a starting area that is always open, and the second starting port 12 is a starting area that is opened only when the electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory is operating. In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, or when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is performed. Whether or not to execute is determined, and a symbol indicating the determination result is displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 of the display 4, which will be described later. Then, when the symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game in which the jackpot 13 is opened is executed.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting port 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the determination is performed on the condition that the game ball is won in the second starting port 12. The determination to be executed is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these determinations are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

The large winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the large winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the large winning opening 13. The grand prize opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the above plate is operated to open the jackpot 13 in the jackpot game. Is executed. During the big hit game, the big winning opening is until the predetermined condition (in this embodiment, eight game balls are won in the big winning opening 13 or 29.5 seconds have passed since the big winning opening 13 was opened). A long open round game in which 13 is maintained in the open state and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times at a predetermined time interval.

In this way, since the big prize opening 13 is opened for a long time during the big hit game, the player can make a right-handed hit during the big hit game to obtain more prizes than when the big hit game is not performed. You can get a ball.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed posture in which a pair of blade members close the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1) and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). The posture can be changed.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened, the operation of the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time and then returning to the closed posture is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas the game ball is easily passed in the second starting port 12 when the electric tulip 17 is operating. Become.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination".

The ordinary winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, the determination is not made even if the game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14.

[Structure example of the production means of the gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a speaker 24, a production accessory 7, a board lamp 25, and the like as various effects. Further, the frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) which is not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position that is easily visible by the player. On the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or an item, a hold image (hold icon) displayed as many as the number of pending special symbol determinations, and a variable display of the special symbol are displayed. An effect image including various display objects such as the icon suggesting that the image is inside is displayed. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effects, and the like in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 5, and performs a sound effect.

The effect 7 is arranged in front of and to the side of the liquid crystal screen 5. A light emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the effecting object 7. The directing accessory 7 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the accessory itself and / or the light. In the present embodiment, the directing accessory 7 is configured in a shape imitating a sword, and the initial posture (FIG. 1) in which the sword looks almost upright with the handle portion (lower end portion) of the sword as the center of rotation. (See) and the rotating posture (see FIG. 11 (A)) in which the sword appears to be substantially horizontal.

The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color.

[Input means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to input. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation, move the cursor, and the like, and is configured to have an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, the effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27. Further, the gaming machine 1 can adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, change the setting of the appearance rate of a predetermined effect, and the like by operating the effect button 26 and the effect key 27. These are based on FIG. 33. Will be described in detail later.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first display It includes a special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game status indicator 47, a round indicator 48, and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 changes the symbol and then stops and displays the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination to determine the first special symbol determination. Notify the result. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 makes a determination of the second special symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Notify the result. The first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 have a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a "big hit" or a determination result of the special symbol determination as a symbol indicating the determination result. The lost symbol indicating that is "lost" is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of these reservations is set to "4".

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol hold indicator 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round display 48 has an opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 during the big hit game (a round which is the number of round games). Number) is displayed.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as a "special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 45 is referred to as a "normal symbol". It shall be called. Further, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called a "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called a "second special symbol". It may be distinguished.

[Structure of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1.
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the control device of the game machine 1 comprehensively directs the production based on the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game such as various determinations and the transmission of commands, and the commands received from the game control board 100. It is composed of an effect control board 130 that controls the effect, an image / sound control board 140 that controls the effect by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls the effect by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be composed of one board.

[Structure example of game control board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the program or the like stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the main CPU 101 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a first gate switch 114, a second gate switch 115, a large winning opening switch 116, and a large winning opening control unit. 117, the normal winning opening switch 118, and the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the indicator 4 are connected. The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes four ordinary winning opening switches 122 corresponding to four ordinary winning opening 14s (see FIG. 1), but in FIG. 4, one ordinary winning opening switch 122 is provided. Is written only.

The first start port switch 111 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be drive-transmissible in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects the passage of the game ball through the first gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second gate switch 115 detects the passage of the game ball through the second gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

The large winning opening switch 116 detects the winning of the game ball with respect to the large winning opening 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The large winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the large winning opening 13 so as to be drive-transmitted, based on a control signal from the game control board 100. do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

When a detection signal is input from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the large winning opening switch 116, or the normal winning opening switch 118, the main CPU 101 has a predetermined number according to the place where the game ball has won a prize. The payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out the prize balls, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board. Although detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies the game balls to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends out the game balls from the ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. ..

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, various random numbers as acquisition information are acquired at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and the second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, the various random numbers are jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers.

Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) when it is determined to be a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, it first determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on whether or not the acquired jackpot random numbers match a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102. judge. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the type of jackpot is determined based on which random number value of the predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102 the acquired symbol random number matches. Here, as the type of jackpot, for example, "probability variation jackpot" in which the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is completed, or the game is controlled in the time saving game state after the jackpot game is completed. An example is the "normal jackpot" that will result. The game state and the type of jackpot will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not executed in the determination based on the jackpot random number, the main CPU 101 is based on whether or not the acquired reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. Decide whether to perform a production with reach or a production without reach. Further, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is variablely displayed regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is performed. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the jackpot 13 via the jackpot control unit 117 to control the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot. To execute.

Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first gate switch 114 or the second gate switch 115 is input, and executes a normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113.

Further, the main CPU 101 causes each of the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the indicator 4 to execute the above-described processing based on FIG.

[Structure example of effect control board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the sub CPU 131 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing. The RTC134 measures the current date and time (date or time).

The sub CPU 131 sets the effect content based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. At that time, the input of the operation information from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 may be accepted, and the effect content corresponding to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Structure example of image / sound control board 140]
The image / sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, a signal output unit 147 (not shown), and the like. ing. Based on the program stored in the control ROM 142, the control CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image or sound that realizes an effect in which the effect content is set on the effect control board 130. The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the centralized CPU 141 executes the program, and as a work area for data processing and the like.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from the speaker 24. The control CPU 141 generates a control signal based on a command from the effect control board 130 and a program stored in the control ROM 142, outputs the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145, and controls these operations.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 displays an image ROM that stores material data necessary for generating an effect image, a drawing engine that executes drawing processing of the effect image, and an effect image drawn by the drawing engine on a liquid crystal display. It is configured to have an output circuit or the like that outputs to the device 5. The drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the control CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the acoustic DSP 145 is used as an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data related to production sounds such as music, sound, and sound effects, and as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The acoustic DSP 145 reads acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the control CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM into the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the control CPU 141 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second interval) for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). For example, the signal output unit 147 may output a predetermined signal at regular time intervals. The control CPU 141 executes different processing depending on whether a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147 and when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147.

[Configuration example of lamp control board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152, the lamp CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operations of the effector 7, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

Light emission pattern data and operation pattern data are stored in the lamp ROM 152. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating each light emission pattern of the light emitting element, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, etc. built in the effecting object 7. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the effecting object 7 and the like.

The lamp CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and reads the light emission pattern data of the effect 7, the panel lamp 25, The light emission of the frame lamp 37 is controlled. Further, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153 to drive the motor for operating the effect 7. To control.

Further, when the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated by the player, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command to notify the effect to that effect to the effect control board 130.

[About variable production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but here, it is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. An outline explanation of the fluctuation effect will be given.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a variation effect including a variation display of the decorative symbol is performed along with the variation display of the first special symbol (see, for example, FIG. 10). Then, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination (see, for example, FIG. 11 (H)). In this way, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are synchronized. Further, the decorative symbol starts the variable display with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the second special symbol. The variable display of decorative patterns is also synchronized. That is, the decorative symbol is a display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "corresponding display").

A so-called reach effect may be performed during such a variable display of a symbol. Specifically, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a part of a design sequence of decorative symbols in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from bottom to top is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction. , When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, these symbol sequences are variablely displayed so as to scroll from top to bottom (see, for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B). On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed, for example, the decorative symbols in the left column and the right column (left symbol and right symbol) are completely displayed before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Pseudo stop so as not to stop. In addition, the pseudo stop is an effect of making a slight movement of the decorative symbol on the spot without moving it, and in the following explanation, it is referred to as a main stop (sometimes referred to simply as "stop display") in which the decorative symbol is completely stopped. When distinguishing, it may be called a pseudo stop.

When the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, if the same decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line as these symbols, the reach is established and the combination indicating the jackpot (for example, the same decoration such as "333" or "777"). A reach effect is performed that makes the player feel the expectation that the decorative symbol will be pseudo-stopped (and the final stop) at the doublet) where three symbols are aligned. In this reach effect, the player creates a decorative symbol that constitutes a middle row of symbols in a state in which the same decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "reach symbol") that has been pseudo-stopped as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped. It is an effect of scrolling at a low speed so that it can be identified, and finally, a medium symbol common to the reach symbol or a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped on the effective line to notify the winner.

In addition to the decorative design, other effect images such as characters and items may be used for this reach effect (see FIG. 10 (G)). Further, in the following description, in the symbol variation in which the reach effect is performed, the effect performed until the reach is established may be referred to as "pre-reach effect". The pre-reach effect and the reach effect are a case where the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped (and a main stop) in a combination mode showing a big hit, and a case where the main stop is performed in a combination mode other than the combination mode showing a big hit (that is, a combination mode showing a loss). It is a feasible production in both.

The reach effect will be described in detail later, but when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the loss is notified in order to notify the loss. In the combination mode shown, the three decorative symbols are stopped. For example, when the reach effect is performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the reach loss eyes (for example, "343") are stopped as the lost symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three decorative symbols indicating the loose stitches (for example, "154") are stopped as the lost symbols are stopped and displayed. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the loss notification effect of notifying the loss (that the jackpot game is not executed) is performed by pseudo-stopping the three decorative symbols in a manner indicating the loss and then stopping the game. Will be executed.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are immediately started. ..

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the reach effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Then, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (for example, doublets such as "333" and "777"), and then the main stop is performed. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the hit notification effect for notifying the jackpot (the jackpot game is executed) is performed by pseudo-stopping the three decorative symbols in a manner indicating the jackpot and then stopping the game. Will be executed. When this hit notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed.

[About icons]
Even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 during the variable display of the special symbol or the jackpot game, the special symbol judgment or the variable display of the symbol triggered by this winning is immediately displayed. It cannot be executed. Therefore, in the game machine 1, even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12), the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) and the variation display of the symbol are immediately displayed. If it cannot be executed, the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is suspended within a range not exceeding a predetermined number (“4” in the present embodiment), and the reserved number is displayed as the first special symbol pending display. It is displayed on the device 43 (or the second special symbol hold display 44).

On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the first hold icon display area 51 and the first hold icon display area 51 and the display area for displaying the hold icon, which is an effect image suggesting that the special symbol determination and the variable display of the symbol are held, are displayed. A second hold icon display area 52 is provided (see FIG. 1).

The first hold icon display area 51 is an area in which a hold icon suggesting that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the first hold icon display area 51, the same number of hold icons as the number of holds for the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 43 (see FIG. 3) are displayed.

The second hold icon display area 52 is an area in which a hold icon suggesting that the second special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the second hold icon display area 52, the same number of hold icons as the number of holds for the second special symbol determination indicated by the second special symbol hold indicator 44 (see FIG. 3) are displayed.

In FIG. 1, three hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 to suggest that the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “3”, and the second special symbol determination is made. An example shows a state in which two hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 in order to suggest that the number of holds is “2”.

Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the area 53 is used as a display area for displaying a variation suggestion image (hereinafter referred to as “the icon”) suggesting that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is provided (see FIG. 1).

In the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the symbol is started in order to digest the reserved right of the first special symbol determination, it is displayed first among the reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 51. The held icon (the hold icon closest to the area 53) moves from the first hold icon display area 51 to the area 53 and is displayed as the icon. Then, when another hold icon is displayed in the first hold display area 51, the other hold icon shifts to the area 53 side in the first hold icon display area 51.

It should be noted that such a shift process is also performed for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. The icon is an image displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. In addition, since the hold icon is in the variable display of the special symbol (or before a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the stop display of the special symbol), the right to determine the special symbol on hold is granted. It is an image notifying that it is in a state where it cannot be digested immediately. Therefore, the hold icon is an image displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and can be said to be the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested over the first special symbol determination. .. Therefore, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is prioritized over the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51.

The first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is performed based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12). Previously, the hold icon corresponding to the acquired information is displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 (or the second hold icon display area 52). Then, when the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol are performed based on the acquired information corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 (or the second hold icon display area 52), the special symbol is displayed. The hold icon moves to the area 53 and is displayed in the area 53 as the icon suggesting that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the first hold icon display area 51, for example, a normal icon or a special icon is displayed. Here, the normal icon is a default hold icon, for example, a white hold icon. The special icon is a hold icon that suggests jackpot reliability, and the hold icon displayed in a color other than white corresponds to this. The special icons in this embodiment are arranged in order from the one with the lowest suggested jackpot reliability to the one with the highest reliability, and the blue hold icon (blue hold), the green hold icon (green hold), and the red hold icon (red hold). , Golden hold icon (gold hold), rainbow-colored hold icon (rainbow hold), and the jackpot reliability is 5%, 15%, 50%, 75%, 100% (see FIG. 32). ).

The display mode of the normal icon may not change until the special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon is digested, that is, until the normal icon is moved to the area 53 and then erased from the area 53. .. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in, for example, the first hold icon display area 51, it may be displayed as a special icon from the beginning. Further, for example, when the normal icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 changes to a special icon in the first hold icon display area 51 or the area 53, or is displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, for example. The special icon may change to a higher-level special icon once or a plurality of times in the first hold icon display area 51 or the area 53. In the following description, the effect of displaying a special icon as a hold icon to suggest the reliability of the jackpot is referred to as "pre-effect".

On the other hand, in the second hold icon display area 52, a normal icon or a special icon is displayed as in the first hold icon display area 51. Therefore, the description of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 will be omitted.

[About game status]
Hereinafter, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming state. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment controls the game in any of the three gaming states of "normal gaming state", "probability variable gaming state", and "time saving gaming state".

The "normal game state" is a normal game state in which the special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is relatively low, and the electric chew support function is not provided. That is, in the normal game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200) (see FIG. 6A). Further, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is a relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds). Is set to, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time).

The "probability variation game state" is a game state in which a special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively high, and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the probabilistic game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/50) (see FIG. 6A). Further, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds). Is set to, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds × 3 times).

The "time saving game state" is a game state in which the special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and the electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, about 1/200). Further, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds). Is set to, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds × 3 times).

Comparing each game state with respect to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol in the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" is relatively shorter than the variation time of the special symbol in the "normal game state". Easy to set the time.

In addition, the probability that it is determined to execute the special game (big hit probability), the probability that it is determined to open the second starting port 12 (the winning probability of the ordinary symbol determination), and the variation of the ordinary symbol shown in the explanation of each game state. Needless to say, the time and the opening time of the second starting port 12 are merely examples, and may be other probabilities or times.

In the following description, the state in which the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 12 due to the electric chew support function is referred to as a "high base state", and the electric chew support function is provided. A state in which it is not easy for a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 12 due to the absence is referred to as a "low base state".

A game ball hit by the player to the right does not win a prize in the first starting port 11, but may win a prize in the second starting port 12. However, in the low base state, it is difficult to open the second starting port 12, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (in the present embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to this), the player decides to play the game by left-handed aiming at the first starting port 11. Become.

When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 11 in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. As the first special symbol to be shown, the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed and the game state does not change. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol indicating "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which a predetermined number of long open round games are performed according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot game is executed. The game will be controlled in the probabilistic game state. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured as a gaming machine called a probabilistic loop type, and after the jackpot game is completed, the probabilistic gaming state basically continues until the next jackpot.

When the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, that is, when the game state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting port 12 than in the first starting port 11. .. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the right side aiming at the second starting port 12. This also applies when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, and basically, the second special symbol determination is performed in the probabilistic game state or the normal game state.

When the jackpot symbol indicating "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probability variation game state, the game is controlled again in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game ends, and "normal jackpot" is set as the second special symbol. When the indicated jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, in the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol indicating "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the jackpot game in which a predetermined number of long open round games are performed according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and the jackpot game After the end, the game will be controlled in the time-saving game state. Then, in this time-saving game state, if the special symbol determination (basically the second special symbol determination) is performed 50 times (an example of the specified number of times in FIG. 5) but it is not determined to be a big hit, the game state. Shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the jackpot symbol is determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol determination within 50 times and the jackpot symbol indicating "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, it corresponds to the jackpot symbol. After the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state. In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicating "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, after the jackpot game including the long-open round game of a predetermined number of times corresponding to the jackpot symbol is completed, the game is returned to the time-saving game state. The game will be controlled.

As is clear from the description so far, the main CPU 101 can control the game in any one of the three game states of the normal game state, the probabilistic game state, and the time-saving game state. After the jackpot game is executed, the game can be controlled in any one of the two types of game states, the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state.

In another embodiment, for example, a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends is newly provided, and after the jackpot game ends, there are three states: a probability variation game state, a time-saving game state, and a normal game state. A configuration in which the game can be controlled in any of the game states may be adopted.

[About special symbol judgment using random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a special symbol determination using a jackpot random number and a symbol random number will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various random numbers used for the special symbol determination.

The jackpot random number exemplified in FIG. 6A is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S309 in FIG. 41) as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is high. Each of the relatively low low probability state and the high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is relatively high is set individually.

In the present embodiment, with respect to the low probability state, two winning values of "0" and "1" are stored in the main ROM 102, and the main CPU 101 is acquired when the game is controlled in the low probability state. When the jackpot random number matches either of these two winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. Further, regarding the high probability state, in the present embodiment, eight winning values of "0" to "7" are stored in the main ROM 102, and the jackpot random number acquired when the game is controlled in the high probability state is stored. When any of these eight winning values is matched, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed.

The range in which the jackpot random number can be taken is "0" to "399" in the present embodiment in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/200 (= 2/400), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/50 (= 8/400). Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state, the jackpot is likely to be four times as large as in the low probability state.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed, which of the random number values preset for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination. Determine the type of jackpot based on.

Note that, for example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by a hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the setting value related to the jackpot probability is determined according to the operation (for example, pressing) of the setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back surface of the gaming control board 100. (For example, any value from "1" to "3") can be set. The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

For example, the larger the value of the set value, the easier it is to win a jackpot, and the ratio of the jackpot probability in the high probability state to the jackpot probability in the low probability state may be fixed regardless of the set value. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 1/220 when the set value is "1", set to 1/200 when the set value is "2", and the set value is "1". When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Further, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1 / 27.5 (= 1/220 × 8 times) when the set value is “1”, and when the set value is “2”. It is set to 1/25 (= 1/200 × 8 times), and when the set value is “3”, it is set to 1 / 22.5 (= 1/180 × 8 times).

(Type of jackpot related to the first special symbol judgment)
As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, three types of jackpots by winning the first starting opening are prepared: "16R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot". Has been done. Here, the "16R probability variation jackpot" (16R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game in which the long open round game is performed 16 times is executed. The "6R probability variation jackpot" (6R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game in which the long open round game is performed six times is executed. The "6R normal jackpot" (6R normal) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game in which the long open round game is performed six times is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, a random number value for determining the type of the big hit is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 10 random values of "0" to "9" are stored for 16R probability variation, 110 random values of "10" to "119" are stored for 6R probability variation, and 6R. Eighty random values of "120" to "199" are stored as compared to the normal value.

In this embodiment, the range in which the symbol random numbers can be taken is set to "0" to "199". Therefore, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot according to the first start opening prize, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be 16R probability variation is 5% (= 10/200 x 100), and the jackpot type is 6R probability variation. The determined ratio is 55% (= 110/200 × 100), and the ratio at which the type of jackpot is normally determined is 40% (= 80/200 × 100).

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the rate at which the jackpot symbol X1 indicating the 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol is 5%, and the jackpot symbol X2 indicating the 6R probability variation is displayed. The rate of stop display is 55%, and the rate of stop display of the jackpot symbol X3 indicating 6R normal is 40%.

When comparing these three types of jackpots by the number of prize balls that the player can obtain, the following can be said. That is, for example, assuming that 15 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball wins in the large winning opening 13, and one long open round game ends when 8 game balls win, 16R In the probability change, the player can win 1920 (= 15 × 8 × 16) prize balls. Further, under the same assumption, the player can obtain 720 (= 15 × 8 × 6) prize balls in the 6R normal and the 6R probability variation.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol judgment)
As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots due to the second starting opening winning are "16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot", "4R probability variation jackpot", and "8R normal jackpot". There are four types available. Here, the jackpot game performed in the case of "16R probability variation jackpot" (16R probability variation) and the subsequent gaming state are the same as in the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the "8R probability variation jackpot" (8R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game in which the long open round game is performed eight times is executed. The "4R probability variation jackpot" (4R probability variation) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game in which four long open round games are performed is executed. The "8R normal jackpot" (8R normal jackpot) is a jackpot in which the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game in which eight long open round games are performed is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, a random number value for determining the type of the big hit is stored in the main ROM 102. ing. Specifically, 80 random values of "0" to "79" are stored for 16R probability variation, and 20 random values of "80" to "99" are stored for 8R probability variation, and 4R. 20 random values of "110" to "119" are stored for the probability change, and 80 random values of "120" to "199" are stored for the 8R normal.

Here, in the present embodiment, the range in which the symbol random number related to the second special symbol determination can be obtained is common to the range in which the symbol random number related to the second special symbol determination can be obtained. Therefore, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit according to the second starting opening prize, the ratio that the jackpot type is determined to be 16R probability variation is 40% (= 80/200 × 100), and the jackpot type is 8R probability variation. The rate to be determined is 10% (= 20/200 x 100), the rate at which the type of jackpot is determined to be 4R probability variation is also 10% (= 20/200 x 100), and the type of jackpot is 8R normal. The ratio determined for is 40% (= 80/200 × 100).

Therefore, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, the rate at which the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating the 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol is 40%, and the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating the 8R probability variation is displayed. The rate of stop display is 10%, the rate of stop display of the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating 4R probability variation is 10%, and the rate of stop display of the jackpot symbol Y4 indicating 8R normal is 40%.

When comparing these four types of jackpots by the number of prize balls that the player can obtain, the following can be said. That is, for example, assuming that 15 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball wins in the large winning opening 13, and one long open round game ends when 8 game balls win, 16R In the probability change, the player can acquire 1920 (= 15 × 8 × 16) prize balls as in the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed. Further, under the same assumption, the player can obtain 960 (= 15 × 8 × 8) prize balls in the 8R probability variation and the 8R normal. Further, in the 4R probability variation, the player can obtain 480 (= 15 × 8 × 4) prize balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a 4R jackpot game in which the player can obtain 480 prize balls and a 6R jackpot in which the player can obtain 720 prize balls. It is possible to perform a game, an 8R jackpot game in which a player can win 960 prize balls, and a 16R jackpot game in which a player can win 1920 prize balls.

In the present embodiment, odd-numbered symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, 7 symbols, 9 symbols) whose numbers constituting the decorative symbols are odd numbers in green function as probabilistic symbols. Further, even-numbered symbols (2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols) in which the numbers constituting the decorative symbols are even numbers in blue function as normal symbols. Then, the 7 symbols are used for the hit notification effect only when the 16R probability change occurs. Therefore, in the normal gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, when the jackpot symbols X1 and Y1 corresponding to the 16R probabilistic variation are actually stopped, the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "777" are fully stopped, and the other probabilistic jackpots are stopped. When the jackpot symbols X2, Y2, and Y3 corresponding to are stopped, three decorative symbols showing doublets of odd-numbered symbols different from the seven symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999". Is stopped. Further, when the jackpot symbols X3 and Y4 corresponding to the 6R normal and the 8R normal are actually stopped, the three decorative symbols showing doublets of even-numbered symbols are mainly stopped.

The type of jackpot is not limited to the one described above, and may be any mode as long as the player can be in an advantageous state according to the determination result of the special symbol determination. For example, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbols X1 and Y1 is played 10 times in a long open round game (for example, a player can win 1500 (= 15 × 8 × 10) prize balls), and immediately after the jackpot game is completed. It may be a big hit in which the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state.

[Flow of production in normal game state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the effect performed between the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the stop display of the first special symbol. The flow of is explained. Here, FIG. 7 is a flow chart illustrating the flow of the effect in the normal gaming state.

As described above, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player makes a left-handed strike aiming at winning the game ball into the first starting port 11. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11, the main CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination. In this first special symbol determination, in addition to the above-mentioned process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on FIG. 6 and the process of determining the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected. Processing is included, and the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives the fluctuation start command including the information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination from the game control board 100, and based on this information, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, An effect pattern of an effect to be performed using various effect means such as a frame lamp 37 and an effect 7 is set. Then, the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing for realizing an effect based on this setting.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the liquid crystal screen 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 7A). Here, when it is decided at the start of the symbol variation that the non-reach effect is performed, for example, the non-reach effect is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol do not form a reach and are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 7B). ). Examples of this non-reach effect include an effect in which 2 symbols as the left symbol are pseudo-stopped and then 5 symbols as the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, and an effect in which 6 symbols as the left symbol and 4 symbols as the right symbol are simulated and stopped at the same time. Can be mentioned. When this non-reach effect is performed, in most cases, a loss notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols indicating the disparity are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed (see FIG. 7 (C)). In the present embodiment, the same (or similar) effect as the pre-reach effect is executed as the non-reach effect, except that the reach is not established. For this reason, the game determines whether the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect is executed until it is shown that there is no possibility that the reach will be established in this variable display due to the main stop of the decorative symbol. Can't tell.

On the other hand, when it is decided at the start of the symbol variation that the effect with reach is performed, for example, the decorative symbols common to each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and the reach is established (see FIG. 7 (D)). A normal reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal reach") is performed (see FIG. 7 (E)). This normal reach effect is a reach effect that raises the player's expectation that the middle symbol, which is the same as the reach symbol, stops on the effective line connecting the two reach symbols (see FIG. 10 (D)). When this normal reach is performed, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row, which has been scrolled at high speed, gradually decreases. For example, when the reach is established with three symbols (see FIG. 10 (C)), when the three symbols are pseudo-stopped on the effective line as the middle symbol and then the main stop is performed together with the two reach symbols, "333" is displayed. The jackpot is notified as a set of symbols (see FIG. 7 (H)). On the other hand, when a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line and then the main stop is performed together with the two reach symbols, the reach loss item such as "343" is stopped and displayed to notify the loss (Fig.). 7 (C)).

On the other hand, if the scroll display in the middle row continues even after the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol has passed the effective line, the reach effect is changed from the normal reach to the character SP reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "character SP reach"). Will develop (see FIG. 7 (F)). This character SP reach is a reach production with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. In the character SP reach in this embodiment, the following effects are performed. That is, when it develops into the character SP reach, although not shown in the figure, the title related to the character SP reach that displays a message such as "Regain the treasure chest from the enemy!" Is displayed. Then, a scramble effect is performed to show how one's own character (hereinafter referred to as "own character") and an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "enemy character") are competing for a treasure chest (Fig. 7 (F-1), Fig. 7). 13 (A)).

Then, as a result production of the competition production, a competition failure production (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) or a competition success production (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is performed. Here, the competition failure effect is configured as, for example, an effect display showing a state of losing the competition with an enemy character (see FIG. 13B). When this capture failure effect is executed, a development suggestion effect (Fig. 7 (F)) that suggests that the character SP reach as the first stage effect develops into the SPSP reach effect as the second stage effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "SPSP reach"). -4)), or a non-development suggestion effect (see FIG. 7 (F-3)) that suggests that the character SP reach does not develop into SPSP reach is performed. This non-development suggestion effect is configured as, for example, an effect display showing how the enemy character who stole the treasure box escapes (see FIG. 13C). When this non-development suggestion effect is performed, there is no possibility that the jackpot will be notified, and the loss will be notified by the pseudo stop of the reach loss eye (for example, "343") and then the main stop (FIG. 7). (G)). On the other hand, the development suggestion effect is configured as, for example, an effect display showing how a friendly character (friendly character) comes to help the own character, the own character stands up, and then chases the escaped enemy character (Fig.). 13 (E) and (F)). Then, when this development suggestion effect is performed, it will develop into an SPSP reach that shows how the own character discovers the escaped enemy character and the battle between the own character and the enemy character is unfolded (Fig. 7 (I). )reference).

This SPSP reach is a reach production with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach and SP reach, and when your character wins the battle with the enemy character, the symbols are aligned and the jackpot is notified (see Fig. 7 (H)). , When the own character is defeated by the enemy character, the reach loss eye is pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed to notify the loss (see FIG. 7 (G)).

As is clear from the explanation so far, the capture failure effect (see FIG. 7 (F-2)) can be executed in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and the case where the determination result is a loss. However, once the production progresses to the non-development suggestion production, the jackpot notification will not be performed after that. On the other hand, when the production progresses from the capture failure production to the development suggestion production, the jackpot notification may be performed or the loss notification may be performed in the subsequent SPSP reach. That is, when the production progresses to the non-development suggestion production, the possibility of a big hit is not left, whereas when the production progresses to the development suggestion production, the possibility of a big hit remains. ing.

Therefore, when the competition failure effect is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the development suggestion effect is performed instead of the non-development suggestion effect.

On the other hand, the successful capture effect (see FIG. 7 (F-5)) is configured as an effect display showing, for example, how the own character competes with the enemy character and succeeds in capturing the treasure box (FIG. 13 (A) and FIG. (Refer to (H)), when this successful capture effect is performed, a zorome is formed immediately after the successful capture effect without displaying the effect indicating that the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is decreasing. After the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped, they will be stopped immediately (see FIGS. 13 (H) and 13 (I)).

In this way, when the capture success effect is performed, the hit notification effect for notifying that the jackpot game is determined to be executed is executed. Therefore, when it develops into a scramble production, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the capture success production is performed instead of the capture failure production.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect called "next notice" may be performed during the normal reach (see FIG. 7 (K)). This next notice is a production that suggests that it will develop into SPSP reach later, and when the next notice is made, it will directly develop from normal reach to SPSP reach without going through the character SP reach (Fig. 7 (Fig. 7). E), (K), (I)).

On the other hand, in a part of the case where the probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation in FIG. 6B) is won as a result of the first special symbol determination, the non-reach effect (see FIG. 7B) is performed. After that, a bumping effect (see FIG. 7 (J)) may be performed, and immediately after that, a jackpot notification (see FIG. 7 (H)) may be performed. This abduction effect is one of the advance notice effects for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed prior to the stop display of the jackpot symbol as the first special symbol, and will be described in detail later based on FIG. However, it is configured as an effect in which the symbols (probability variation symbols in this embodiment) are suddenly aligned. Since the hitting effect is configured as an effect in which three probabilistic symbols forming doublets suddenly pop out, it is a suggestive effect that suggests that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. It has a function.

In this way, by performing the bumping effect immediately after performing the non-reach effect, it is possible to make the player who did not expect a big hit at all based on the fact that the reach was not established feel unexpected and surprised. It is possible, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

In the present embodiment, the hitting effect can be executed when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation or 6R probability variation, while the hitting effect is not executed when 6R is normal. Has been adopted. In other words, the bump effect can be executed when the odd-numbered symbol alignment is finally stopped due to the stop display of the first special symbol, but is not executed when the even-numbered symbol alignment is finally stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a surprise that the symbols are suddenly aligned, and after the big hit game is completed, in a more advantageous game state (probability change game state) than the 6R normal. Since the game is controlled, the player's joy of being a big hit can be effectively improved.

On the other hand, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the collision effect can be executed only when the 16R probability variation is performed, and the collision effect is not executed when the 6R probability variation or 6R is normal. Further, regardless of the type of jackpot, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, a configuration capable of executing a hitting effect may be adopted. However, in the case of adopting such a configuration, when an even-numbered symbol that normally functions as a normal symbol is suddenly aligned, the player who wants a probabilistic jackpot may feel sufficient joy. As a result, there is a possibility that a high effect cannot be obtained. Therefore, at least, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the hitting effect can be executed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, but the hitting effect is not executed in the case of a normal jackpot.

Regarding the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 7, the flow of the effects from the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 7 (A) to the jackpot notification in FIG. 7 (H) and the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 7 (A) to FIG. 7 (A) The flow of the effect up to the loss notification of C) and (G) is the result of determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game, the result of determining whether or not to perform the effect with reach, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. Based on this, it is set by the sub CPU 131.

Further, the specific effect described with reference to FIG. 7 is merely an example, and each effect may be another effect. For example, the scramble effect may be an effect display showing a state in which the own character is about to be robbed of the mobile phone by an enemy character but is trying to regain it. In this case, the effect of displaying the effect indicating that the own character succeeds in regaining the mobile phone from the enemy character is executed as the successful capture effect, and conversely, the state in which the own character is robbed of the mobile phone by the enemy character is shown. It is conceivable to execute the effect of displaying the effect as a capture failure effect. In addition, the character SP reach is not a production that starts with a scramble production, but is simply a production that shows how the character is trying to destroy a medium symbol different from the reach symbol, and the destruction is successful. For example, the patterns may be aligned, and if the destruction fails, the reach loss eyes may be displayed.

Further, in another embodiment, an effect pattern that directly develops from the establishment of the reach to the character SP reach or the SPSP reach without going through the normal reach may be prepared.

[Flow of production in the probabilistic game state]
Next, referring to FIG. 8, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, it is performed between the start of the variable display of the second special symbol and the stop display of the second special symbol. The flow of production will be explained. Here, FIG. 8 is a flow chart illustrating the flow of the effect in the probabilistic game state.

As described above, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the player strikes the second starting port 12 with the aim of winning the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 12, the main CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination. In this second special symbol determination, in addition to the above-mentioned process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on FIG. 6 and the process of determining the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, a variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected. Processing is included, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined by selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 receives the fluctuation start command including the information indicating the result of the second special symbol determination from the game control board 100, and based on this information, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, An effect pattern of an effect to be performed using various effect means such as a frame lamp 37 and an effect 7 is set. Then, the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 perform processing for realizing an effect based on this setting.

When the second special symbol determination is performed, the liquid crystal screen 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 8A). Here, when it is decided at the start of the symbol variation that the non-reach effect is performed, for example, the non-reach effect is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol do not form a reach and are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 8B). ). Since this non-reach effect can be similar to the non-reach effect described with reference to FIG. 7B, detailed description here will be omitted. In this way, when the non-reach effect is performed in the probabilistic game state, in most cases, the loss notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols forming the loose eyes are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed as it is (FIG. 8 (C). )reference).

On the other hand, when it is decided at the start of the symbol variation that the effect with reach is performed, for example, the decorative symbols common to each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and the reach is established (see FIG. 8 (D)). A battle reach production (hereinafter abbreviated as "battle reach") is performed (see FIG. 8 (E)). This battle reach is a reach effect in which your character and the enemy character battle each other, and when a victory suggestion effect (see Fig. 8 (F)) that shows how your character wins over the enemy character is performed, a probability change jackpot will occur. Be notified (see FIG. 8 (G)). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the probabilistic gaming state, odd-numbered symbols (1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, 7 symbols, 9 symbols) function as probabilistic symbols, and even-numbered symbols (2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols). , 8 symbols) function as normal symbols. For this reason, in the probability variation jackpot notification of FIG. 8 (G), an effect display is performed in which the three decorative symbols whose odd-numbered symbols are aligned are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped.

The victory suggestion effect is performed when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a probability change jackpot, and when this victory suggestion effect is performed and the probability change jackpot is notified, the probability change game state will continue. ..

On the other hand, following the battle reach, a defeat suggestion effect (see FIG. 8 (H)) showing how the own character is defeated by the enemy character may be performed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, a normal hit notification is performed in which the three decorative symbols having even-numbered symbols aligned with each other are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped (FIG. 8). (I)). The display mode of the decorative symbol used for the normal jackpot notification is not limited to this, and may be other than the combination of the decorative symbols used for the probability variation jackpot notification. You may use it.

Further, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probabilistic jackpot, a revival effect (see FIG. 8J) may be performed following the defeat suggestion effect. This revival effect is configured as an effect display that shows how the own character, who had been defeated by the enemy character and collapsed, revives and stands up due to the appearance of a ally character. When this revival effect is performed, the above-mentioned victory suggestion effect (see FIG. 8 (F)) is performed, and the probability change jackpot notification (see FIG. 8 (G)) is performed.

In this embodiment, the revival effect is performed only when the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6C) is a 16R probability variation in which the display is stopped, and the revival effect is performed. At that point, the winning of the 16R probability change becomes rich. Therefore, the revival effect can be regarded as a notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "big hit notice") that announces that the jackpot game will be executed. The jackpot notice is an effect that can be executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "big hit", and is not executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "missing". It is a 100% production. In the present embodiment, many jackpot notices are prepared in addition to the revival effect, but these jackpot notices will be appropriately described in the present specification.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured as a gaming machine called a battle type, and is configured so that the reach cannot be established unless some kind of jackpot such as a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is won in the probabilistic gaming state. If your character defeats the enemy character, the probabilistic game state will continue, and if your character loses to the enemy character, the probabilistic game state will end and you will fall into the time-saving game state, which is an easy-to-understand game. There is.

On the other hand, in a part of the case where the probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation in FIG. 6C) is won as a result of the second special symbol determination, the non-reach effect (see FIG. 8B) is performed. After that, a bumping effect (see FIG. 8 (K)) may be performed, and immediately after that, a probability variation jackpot notification (see FIG. 8 (G)) may be performed. In other words, the abduction effect can be executed when the 7 symbol alignments are finally stopped due to the stop display of the 2nd special symbol, but is not executed when the 7 symbol alignments are not finally stopped. This abduction effect is one of the advance notice effects for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed prior to the stop display of the jackpot symbol as the second special symbol, and will be described in detail later based on FIG. However, it is configured as a production in which the symbols (probability variation symbols) are suddenly aligned.

In this way, by performing the bumping effect immediately after performing the non-reach effect, it is possible to make the player who did not expect a big hit at all based on the fact that the reach was not established feel unexpected and surprised. It is possible, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

In the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, when the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 4R probability variation, the collision effect can be executed, and when the 8R is normal, the collision effect can be executed. The configuration that does not execute the hit effect is adopted. On the other hand, in other embodiments, in the probabilistic game state, the hitting effect can be executed only when the 16R probable change is performed, and when the hit is another big hit such as the 8R probable change, the 4R probable change, or the 8R normal. A configuration that does not execute the effect may be adopted. Further, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, a configuration capable of executing the bumping effect may be adopted.

Regarding the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 8, the flow of the effects from the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 8 (A) to the notification of the loss in FIG. 8 (C), and from the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 8 (A) to FIG. 8 (G). ), The flow of the effect from the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 8 (A) to the normal hit notification in FIG. 8 (I) is the determination of whether or not to execute the jackpot game. As a result, it is set by the sub CPU 131 based on the result of determining whether or not to perform the effect with reach, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

[About the decorativeness of decorative patterns]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the decorativeness of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decorativeness of the decorative pattern.

(Decorativeness of decorative patterns in normal game state)
When the game is controlled in the normal game state, the decorative symbols in the following display modes are displayed in each effect section during the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, before the reach, which is the effect period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the establishment of the reach, the decorative symbol with a character attached to a large number is displayed, although it does not appear in the figure. This also applies during the normal reach accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10 (D)).

On the other hand, during the character SP reach or SPSP reach accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol, a decorative symbol consisting of small numbers without a character is displayed. That is, in the case of developing from normal reach to character SP reach or SPSP reach, the character is removed from the decorative symbol consisting of large numbers with the character attached, and the decorative symbol (number) becomes smaller and the screen is displayed from the center of the screen. It moves to the peripheral part (see, for example, FIGS. 10 (E) to 10 (G)). This character is a display (hereinafter, referred to as "additional display") superimposed on the back side of the numbers (green or blue in the present embodiment) constituting the decorative pattern. For example, each number constituting the decorative pattern Different to.

In the following description, the decorative symbol consisting of large numbers with characters is referred to as the "decorative symbol of the first aspect", and the decorative symbol consisting of small numbers without characters is referred to as the "decorative symbol of the second aspect". Call.

For example, when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped and when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is changed to the decorative symbol of the second aspect (and vice versa), additional display is performed. The limbs of the character move, dressing up and deciding the pose. However, when scrolling, the limbs of the character, which is an additional display, do not move and do not pose regardless of the speed. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, and the character as an additional display does not move at all and becomes a still image. In another embodiment, while the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are still images during the stop display of the special symbol, the character as an additional display may be dressed and pose.

Further, at the time of the hit notification in which the decorative symbol in the mode of notifying the jackpot or loss is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol in the display mode common to that before the reach is displayed (for example, FIG. 11 (E). ), (H)). Therefore, when the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed following the character SP reach or SPSP reach, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern is the opposite of that illustrated in FIG. 10 (F). Change will occur. That is, the decorative symbol consisting of small numbers without a character (the decorative symbol of the second aspect) moves from the peripheral portion of the screen to the center of the screen while becoming larger, and along with this, the decorative symbol (number) is attached with a character. Will be done. The decorative symbol is expanded from the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect to the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect magnified three times, and then becomes the state of the decorative symbol of the first aspect. The decorative design of the second aspect and the decorative pattern of the first aspect, which are magnified three times, may have substantially the same vertical and horizontal sizes.

As is clear from the explanations so far, in the normal gaming state, before the reach and the normal reach where the decorative symbol having a large number and a character (that is, the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is displayed. It can be said that the decorative design is highly decorative at the time of notification of winning. On the other hand, in the character SP reach and SPSP reach, an effect using an object different from the decorative pattern such as a character or an item is developed, so a small number without a character is attached so as not to interfere with this effect. By displaying the decorative symbol (that is, the decorative symbol of the second aspect) composed of the same on the peripheral portion of the screen, it is possible to prevent the decorative symbol from deteriorating the visibility of the effect image used for the above effect.

(Decorativeness of decorative patterns in the probabilistic game state)
When the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, for example, the decorative symbol of the second aspect is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, decorative symbols having the following display modes are displayed in each effect section during the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, before the reach, which is the production period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the establishment of the reach, the decorative symbol (specifically,) which is not shown in the figure but has no character attached to a large number. Is displayed (for example, see FIG. 15C). This is also the case at the time of the hit notification when the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is actually stopped when the second special symbol is finally stopped. The "decorative symbol obtained by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times" may be displayed by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be enlarged three times. The image data of the above is prepared in advance in the control ROM 144 of the image / acoustic control board 140 separately from the image data related to the decorative symbol of the second aspect, and this data may be used for display.

In the probabilistic game state, the player is most interested in whether the reach is established by the probabilistic symbol or the reach is established by the normal symbol. Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 6A), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state is larger than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. Is relatively short, and in the probabilistic game state, the production is developed at a good tempo, and after the jackpot game is completed, the winning is notified in a relatively short time. From these facts, it is less necessary to enhance the decorativeness of the decorative pattern more than necessary in the probabilistic game state, and in the present embodiment, a configuration in which characters are not added to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern is adopted.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic game state, when the reach is established and the battle reach is developed, the battle between the own character and the enemy character is developed at the center of the screen of the liquid crystal screen 5. For this reason, if a decorative pattern with a large number is displayed in the center of the screen even if the character is not attached, it hinders the battle effect. Therefore, during the battle reach, the size and display position of the decorative symbol are changed in order to display the decorative symbol of the second aspect as in the character SP reach and SPSP reach in the normal game state. That is, the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect enlarged three times is reduced to the same size as the decorative symbol of the second aspect during the character SP reach or SPSP reach at the time of battle reach development. The decorative pattern of the second aspect, which is not enlarged, is displayed on the peripheral edge of the screen.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 9, before the reach and the hit notification in the probabilistic game state, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are displayed in large size, which is common to the reach before the normal game state and the hit notification. , The difference is that no character is attached. Further, as compared with the character SP reach and SPSP reach in the normal game state, although it is common in that no character is attached, it differs in that the numbers constituting the decorative pattern are large. From these facts, it can be said that the decorative design displayed before the reach or at the time of winning notification in the probabilistic game state has a medium degree of decorativeness. On the other hand, during battle reach, the numbers that make up the decorative symbol are small, and the character is not assigned, which is the same as during character SP reach or SPSP reach. Therefore, the decoration of the decorative symbol displayed during battle reach is displayed. It can be said that the sex is low.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is controlled to change the display mode of the decorative symbol in order to change the decorativeness of the decorative symbol according to the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Specifically, the state of the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect, or the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be the state of the decorative symbol of the first aspect. do. In addition, both the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed at the same time. For example, in normal reach, the left symbol and the right symbol that have been pseudo-stopped are set as the decorative symbols of the first aspect, and the middle symbol that scrolls slowly downward is enlarged with the decorative symbol of the second aspect (for example, with scrolling). It may be in a state where it may be reduced or reduced).

[Specific example: Pattern that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach]
10 and 11 are screen views showing specific examples of the effect of developing SPSP reach via normal reach. FIG. 12 is a time chart showing a specific example of the display mode of the decorative symbol when the promotion effect is executed.

In FIG. 10A, in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol in a mode indicating that there is a presence is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as green hold.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51. A special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is shifted to the area 53, and the second hold icon is shifted to the position where the earliest hold icon was displayed. The shift process is performed, and along with this, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (see FIGS. 10A and 10B).

Here, when the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, if the variation effect pattern that develops into the SPSP reach via the normal reach is set, for example, the following effect is performed.

That is, when a predetermined time elapses from the variable display of the decorative symbol, the three symbols as the left symbol are first pseudo-stopped, and then the same three symbols as the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, and the reach is established (FIG. 10 (C)). reference). When the reach is established in this way, the above-mentioned normal reach is performed (see FIG. 10 (D)).

During this normal reach, if the same middle symbol (here, 3 symbols) as the reach symbol passes through the effective line as a result of scrolling the middle row symbol row, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row increases thereafter. Therefore, it may develop into SPSP reach (see FIGS. 10 (E) to 10 (G)). At that time, the three large symbol rows displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 are reduced while maintaining the reach state and moved to the upper left corner area of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 10 (F)). The decorative symbol is a decorative symbol of the second aspect that is not enlarged after the state of the decorative symbol of the first aspect is first changed to the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect enlarged three times. It will be in a certain state. When the size and display area of the three symbol rows are changed in this way (that is, when the state of the decorative symbol of the first aspect is changed to the state of the decorative symbol of the second aspect), the liquid crystal screen SPSP reach is executed using the area in the center of the screen of No. 5 (see FIG. 10 (G)).

In the present embodiment, the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) is pseudo-stopped in the upper left end region of the liquid crystal screen 5, while the middle symbol continues to be scrolled at high speed. When the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed, the scroll speed is slowed down or increased in order to pay attention to the movement of the middle symbol, whereas the decorative symbol of the second aspect is small, so that the middle symbol is tentatively displayed. Even if the scroll speed is changed, it is difficult to understand, and there is a possibility that the effect cannot be effectively improved. Therefore, when the decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed, the display mode of the middle symbol is different from that when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed. Specifically, when the decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed, the scroll speed of the middle symbol is kept constant (high-speed fluctuation). In another embodiment, when the decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed, the scroll speed of the middle symbol may be slowed down (or increased), or the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation may be hidden. May be good. Further, the speed at which the decorative symbol of the second aspect scrolls at high speed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbol of the first aspect scrolls at high speed, or both may be at the same speed.

Further, the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) displayed in the upper left corner area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed on the front side of the other effect images. Therefore, for example, when another effect image is displayed on the entire screen, the reach symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side. By displaying only the reach symbol in the upper left corner area of the liquid crystal screen 5, the reach symbol may be visually recognized even if another effect image is displayed.

Fig. 10 (G) shows that the two own characters and the enemy character are facing each other, but when it develops into SPSP reach, first, SPSP such as "Decisive Battle OOOO VS XXX" The title display for displaying the reach title related to the reach effect is performed. Then, a battle production showing how the own character and the enemy character battle is started.

When the SPSP reach is performed in this way, the operation promotion effect is performed at the end of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 10 (H)). This operation promotion effect is an effect that urges the player to operate the effect button 26. Specifically, for example, a button image imitating the effect button 26, a message such as "press!" That urges the operation, and the player. It is configured as an effect to display a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period in which the button operation by is effective.

Here, when the player performs an operation within the valid period, an effect called cut-in is performed as an operation-compatible effect that corresponds to the operation (see FIG. 10 (I)). Here, the cut-in is configured as an effect of superimposing a specific effect image on the effect image related to the SPSP reach, and the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display mode of the specific effect image. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the blue cut-in suggesting that the jackpot reliability is about 10%, the red cut-in that the jackpot reliability is about 60%, and the jackpot reliability is 100%. A rainbow-colored cut-in suggesting the above is prepared, and one of these three cut-ins is executed according to the operation based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a cut-in does not occur unless the player performs an operation, but in other embodiments, when the operation is not performed, the validity period ends at the timing. A configuration that automatically generates a cut-in may be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion effect and the cut-in according to the operation are configured to occur during the SPSP reach but not during the character SP reach, but in other embodiments, the SPSP is adopted. A configuration in which a cut-in can occur may be adopted for a reach effect other than the reach (for example, during the character SP reach).

If the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a big hit, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, at the end of SPSP reach, a victory notification effect that notifies that the own character has defeated the enemy character and won the battle. Is performed (see FIG. 11 (A)). In this victory notification effect, for example, the characters "victory !!" are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the sound "victory !!" is output from the speaker 24, and the effect 7 is rotated while emitting rainbow colors. An example is the production of making it. When this victory notification effect is performed, the same decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) as the reach symbol as the middle symbol is pseudo-stopped between the reach symbols (decorative symbol of the second aspect) (FIG. 11). (A) and timing T1 in FIG. 12 (A)). Along with this, although not shown in the figure, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit rainbow colors.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol approaches the end, three decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) in which characters are attached to large numbers are pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (FIG. 11). (B) and timing T2 in FIG. 12 (A)). In FIG. 11B, for convenience of explanation, the notation of characters attached to the numbers constituting the decorative design is omitted.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the decorative symbols of the three first aspects forming doublets are pseudo-stopped, the "first reflection effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (See FIG. 12 (A)). The "first reflection effect" is an effect of adding a highlight light such as metallic luster to each decorative pattern and outputting an effect sound such as "Pishan!" From the speaker 24. In the first reflection effect, for example, the highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left symbol, and at the same time, the highlight light is similarly added to the middle symbol and the right symbol. As a result, the light radiated to the decorative pattern can be made to appear as if it was mirror-reflected in front of the decorative pattern, and three identical decorative patterns can be emphasized as if they were objects having metallic luster. I can emphasize that more.

In the present embodiment, the first reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative symbol of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative symbol of the second aspect.

In addition, while the hit notification effect may be performed when the three decorative symbols (“333” in the example shown in FIG. 11 (B)) are stopped as they are, the three decorative symbols forming doublets are pseudo-stopped. After that, a promotion effect (see FIG. 11 (C)) may be performed (timing T3 in FIG. 12 (A)). This promotion effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the three decorative symbols forming doublets are promoted to 16R probability change depending on whether or not the three decorative symbols forming doublets are changed to the three decorative symbols forming doublets. .. This promotion effect is composed of the first half and the second half, and the first half effect is common to both the case where the promotion failure effect is performed and the case where the promotion success effect is performed in the second half. In the first half of this promotion effect, specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 11C, three decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) fade out toward the back of the liquid crystal screen 5. The state in which the three decorative symbols have become smaller is maintained for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds).

In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "333" are pseudo-stopped. Therefore, as the jackpot symbol X2 stops as the first special symbol, these decorative symbols stop as they are, so that it is notified that the 6R probability variation has been won.

Here, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is a 6R probability variation, the promotion failure effect as the latter half of the promotion effect is performed following the first half of the promotion effect (FIGS. 11 (C) and 11 (D), FIG. 12 (A), see timing T4). This promotion failure effect is an effect in which the three decorative symbols that became smaller in the first half of the promotion effect return as they are while becoming larger without changing to other decorative symbols, and the promotion failure is notified. Accompanied by the output of directing sound. In the example shown in FIG. 11, following the promotion failure effect, a hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols forming the doublets of "333" are stopped as they are (FIGS. 11 (E) and 12 (A)). ) Timing T5). Then, when this hit notification effect is performed for a predetermined time, the opening period of the jackpot game is started, and during the opening period, an effect of notifying the type of jackpot and a right-handed suggestion for the player to hit right are performed (Fig.). 11 (F)). Specifically, the characters "BIG BONUS" are displayed and the voice is output to notify that the type of jackpot is 6R probability variation, and the voice "Please hit right" is output and "Right". An effect is performed in which the characters "hit" and an arrow pointing to the right are displayed at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5. During the subsequent round game, one decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the second aspect) showing the same number as the stopped decorative symbol is displayed, and this decorative symbol is erased when the ending is started. ..

On the other hand, when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is a 16R probability variation, the promotion success effect as the second half of the promotion effect is performed following the first half of the promotion effect (FIGS. 11 (C) and (G), 12). (See timing T4 in (A)). In this promotion success effect, the three decorative symbols (here, "333") that faded out to the back of the LCD screen 5 and became smaller are changed to three decorative symbols of "777" indicating that the 16R probability variation is achieved. This is an effect of making a large pseudo-stop in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and is accompanied by an output of an effect sound for notifying the success of promotion. When this promotion success effect is performed, a hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols indicating the doublets of "777" are stopped as they are (see timing T5 in FIGS. 11 (H) and 12 (A)). Then, during the opening period of the jackpot game, an effect of notifying the type of jackpot and a right-handed suggestion for urging the player to hit right are performed (see FIG. 11 (I)). The production during this opening period is the same as the above-mentioned opening production based on FIG. 11 (F), except that the characters "HYPER BONUS" are displayed instead of "BIG BONUS" and the sound is output. Is what you do. During the round game, one 7 symbols (decorative symbols of the second aspect) are displayed, and these 7 symbols are deleted when the ending is started.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the promotion failure effect or promotion success effect, the "second reflection effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second) (FIG. 12 (A)). )reference). In the "second reflection effect", for example, the highlight light is added to each decorative pattern as in the first reflection effect, and the character lines attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern (for example, "time is full"). This is an effect of outputting a line) from the speaker 24. In the second reflection effect, for example, the highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers constituting the left symbol, and at the same time, the numbers constituting the middle symbol and the right symbol are also highlighted in the same manner. Add light. In this way, in the second reflection effect, the highlight light is attached to the entire decorative pattern in that the highlight light is attached to the numbers but not to the character. It is different from the reflection effect. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the decorative symbol in the pattern matching mode that will be stopped from now on without deteriorating the visibility of the character that emits the above lines.

In the present embodiment, the second reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative symbol of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative symbol of the second aspect.

As illustrated in FIG. 12A, the present embodiment is configured so that the stop display timing of the first special symbol arrives when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses from the end of the second reflection effect. ing. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative symbol starts the main stop when a predetermined time (4 seconds in the example of FIG. 12A) elapses from the end of the second reflection effect. By providing a predetermined time between the second reflection effect and the main stop, for example, even if a frame drop due to double buffering occurs in the second reflection effect, it can be prevented from affecting the main stop.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, when the central CPU 141 of the image / sound control board 140 executes the drawing process of the image data, the image data development area is provided at two locations and the image data is alternately developed in each development area. Double buffering. For example, if the amount of image data at the time of executing the second reflection effect is large, it takes time to generate the image, and the previously displayed screen is redisplayed, which may cause frame dropping. There is.

In the present embodiment, the image / sound control board 140 is an image (determined by the effect control board 130) determined at the start of the variation effect when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 (not shown) is input. Is generated and output. On the other hand, the image / sound control board 140 does not generate the image (determined by the effect control board 130) determined at the start of the variation effect when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. For example, the signal output unit 147 does not output a predetermined signal when the previously displayed screen is redisplayed (when frame dropping occurs). In this case, the image / sound control board 140 may generate and output another image different from the image (determined by the effect control board 130) determined at the start of the variation effect.

For example, since the variation pattern D or I is selected, it is determined that the decorative symbol in the jackpot mode (decorative symbol in the first aspect) is actually stopped at the timing when 70 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation in the first special symbol. If this is the case, the image / sound control board 140 can stop the decorative symbol at the above timing when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147. On the other hand, even when it is determined to output the image in which the decorative symbol is actually stopped at the above timing, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image / sound control board 140 may be used. The decorative pattern is not stopped at the above timing. In this case, the image / sound control board 140 may output an image other than the main stopped decorative symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern may not be displayed in the situation where the frame is dropped.

Since the present embodiment employs a configuration in which a predetermined time is provided between the second reflection effect and the main stop, a period during which the amount of image data is small (the above-mentioned predetermined time) is provided after the end of the second reflection effect. The decorative pattern can be stopped through this. As a result, the decorative design can be reliably stopped without being affected by dropping frames.

As illustrated in FIG. 12B, in the present embodiment, even in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state (that is, during the variable display of the second special symbol), in the normal game state (that is, the first special symbol). A promotion effect similar to (during display of fluctuations in) may be executed. Specifically, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol approaches the end, three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol obtained by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times) are in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See, for example, timing T6 in FIGS. 28 (H) and 12 (B)). When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the pseudo stop, the same effect as the first half of the promotion effect in the normal game state is performed in a shorter execution time (for example, 2 seconds) than in the normal game state (for example, 2 seconds). Timing T7) in FIG. 12 (B).

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the promotion failure effect or promotion success effect is started following the first half of the promotion effect, the "third reflection effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). (Timing T8 in FIG. 12B). The "third reflection effect" is the same effect as the first reflection effect, but the highlight light is added to the decorative pattern in which the decorative pattern in the second aspect is magnified three times. It differs from the first reflection effect in that it is not a decorative pattern. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the third reflection effect, the stop display timing of the second special symbol arrives, and the decorative symbol is finally stopped accordingly (timing T9 in FIG. 12B). ). The predetermined time between the third reflection effect and the main stop is a period for preventing the occurrence of frame dropping in the third reflection effect from affecting the main stop. By limiting this period to the minimum time that can prevent the influence of dropped frames, it can be configured to be shorter than the period between the reflection effect and the main stop in the normal game state, and the progress of the game in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state. Can be speeded up.

In addition, referring to FIG. 11, the case where the odd-numbered symbols (probability variation symbols) of doublets other than the 7 symbols are changed to 7 symbols to make the 6R probability variation appear to be promoted to the 16R probability variation has been described. It is also possible to change the even-numbered doublet symbols to odd-numbered doublet symbols to perform a promotion effect that makes it appear that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, these promotion effects are performed shortly before the first special symbol stops, but in other embodiments, these promotion effects may be performed during the jackpot game.

As a promotion effect that makes it appear that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot during the jackpot game, for example, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 during the round game of the predetermined round is performed, and the player As an example, there is an effect of displaying characters such as "Probability change get!" Or outputting a predetermined notification sound according to the button operation by.

In addition, as a promotion effect that makes it appear that the 6R probability change or the 6R normal is promoted to the 16R probability change during the jackpot game, for example, in the sixth long open round game, a character such as "EXTRA ROUND get!" Is displayed. As an example, an effect of operating the effecting object 7 while outputting the sound together with the effect is given. It should be noted that such a round promotion effect may be performed not during the long-open round game of the sixth round, but when the long-open round game of the seventh round is started.

In addition, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot notice is more easily executed (may be executed) than when it is a normal jackpot. Can be considered. By adopting such a configuration, when the jackpot advance notice effect is executed, the promotion success effect is more likely to be executed than when the jackpot advance notice effect is not executed, and the player's response to the execution of the jackpot advance notice is Expectations can be raised effectively. When the jackpot notice is executed, the promotion success effect may be executed.

In addition, when the variation pattern A is selected, the abrupt effect is performed in which the symbols are suddenly aligned and the main stop is performed. Therefore, when the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the variation pattern A, the promotion effect is performed. Is never done.

In another embodiment, the first reflection effect may be performed using the second decorative pattern. For example, immediately after the end of the victory notification effect (timing T2 in FIG. 12A), the decorative symbol of the second aspect is pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. By executing the first reflection effect using such a decorative pattern, it is possible to enhance the continuity with the victory notification effect and improve the sense of unity. After the first reflection effect, the second reflection effect may be executed using the decorative pattern. In this case, since no character is attached to the decorative symbol, the entire decorative symbol is highlighted in the second reflection effect as in the first reflection effect. Alternatively, after the first reflection effect, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the first half of the promotion effect, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 instead of the decorative symbol. The second reflection effect may be executed by quasi-stopping and using this decorative symbol.

Further, in another embodiment, for example, a second reflection effect is produced in which the numbers constituting the decorative pattern are not highlighted, while the characters constituting the decorative pattern are highlighted. May be. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the decorative symbol in the pattern matching mode without deteriorating the visibility of the numbers.

Further, in another embodiment, for example, an effect of highlighting the entire decorative pattern (specifically, the entire number and the character constituting the decorative pattern) or an effect of highlighting the entire screen centering on the decorative pattern is performed. It may be used as a second reflection effect. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a dynamic effect as compared with highlighting only numbers, and it is possible to further emphasize the decorative pattern in the form of pattern matching.

Further, in another embodiment, only the second reflection effect may be executed without executing the first reflection effect. In addition, the period from the end of the second reflection effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol (normal game state) and the period from the end of the third reflection effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) are set. It may be the same time (for example, 4 seconds).

In addition, the period from the end of the second reflection effect to the main stop of the decorative symbol (normal game state), the period from the end of the third reflection effect in the probabilistic game state to the main stop of the decorative symbol, and the third in the time-saving game state. 3 The period from the end of the reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative pattern may be different or the same.

Each effect executed until the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a pattern-aligned manner and finally stopped can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed. Furthermore, each effect from the start of the promotion failure effect or the start of the promotion success effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol has a function of notifying which type of jackpot game will be executed, and a game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be regarded as a big hit notice with a function to give notice.

It should be noted that not only when the jackpot is notified by SPSP reach, but also when the jackpot is notified by normal reach or character SP reach, the explanation will be made with reference to FIGS. 11 (B) and 12 (A). A similar effect is performed.

Further, the effects described with reference to FIGS. 11B and 12 and 12 may or may not be executed when the reach symbols are 7 symbols (that is, when the 16R probability variation is achieved). .. In the former case, it is not necessary to change the scale of the effect after the symbol alignment according to the type of reach symbol, and in the latter case, it is possible to suppress the execution of the promotion effect in which the mode of the symbol alignment is completely unlikely to change. can.

Further, depending on the type of jackpot, the period from the end of the second reflection effect (or the third reflection effect) to the final stop of the decorative symbol may be different or the same. For example, in the case of 16R probability variation, the period from the end of the second reflection effect (or the third reflection effect) to the final stop of the decorative symbol may be longer or shorter than in the case of other jackpots. You may.

[Specific example of character SP reach]
Next, a specific example of the character SP reach in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is a screen view showing a specific example of the character SP reach.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the normal reach (see FIG. 7 (E)) develops into the competition effect of the character SP reach (see FIG. 7 (F-1)), the three symbols forming the reach are formed. With the rows displayed small in the upper left corner of the LCD screen 5, a scramble effect is performed to show how the character and the enemy character are competing for a treasure chest (an example of an item) (see FIG. 13 (A)). Although it does not appear in FIG. 13 (A), it relates to the character SP reach, which displays a character such as "Regain the treasure chest from the enemy!" And outputs the voice when the competition production is started. Displaying the reach title The title is displayed.

Following this scramble effect, a capture failure effect may be performed to show how the enemy character robs the enemy character of the treasure chest and collapses (see FIG. 13 (B)). Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the symbol change is a loss, the enemy character who stole the treasure box goes away and displays a character such as "escape ...". Is performed (see FIG. 13 (C)). This non-development suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the character SP reach does not develop into SPSP reach, and when the non-development suggestion effect is performed, the reach loss eye (for example, "343") is pseudo-stopped and then the main stop. The loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 13 (D)).

On the other hand, following the scramble production, a development suggestion production is performed in which a friend comes to help and the character who has collapsed stands up and a character such as "I will chase the enemy!" Is displayed (Fig. 13 (E) and). (F)). This development suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the character SP reach develops into SPSP reach. When the development suggestion production is performed, the title display that displays the reach title related to SPSP reach such as "Decisive battle XXX VS XXX" is performed, and the battle production in which the own character and the enemy character fight is started. (See FIG. 13 (G)).

When the SPSP reach is developed in this way, if the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the hit notification effect is executed following the SPSP reach, and if it is lost, the SPSP reach is reached. Subsequently, the loss notification effect will be executed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a big hit, the capture success effect may be performed to show how the own character succeeds in capturing the treasure box from the enemy character, following the competition effect (Fig.). 13 (H)). In this successful capture production, three decorative symbols (probability variation symbols or normal symbols) that form doublets are displayed from the reclaimed treasure box, and when these three decorative symbols are stopped, a big hit is made. Be notified (see FIG. 13 (I)).

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a successful capture effect (see FIG. 13 (H)) or a failed capture effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) as a result effect of the competition effect (see FIG. 13 (A)). ) Is possible, and the successful capture effect is executed when the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and then the hit notification effect is always executed (for example, FIG. 17 (A)). And (B)).

On the other hand, when the capture failure effect (see FIG. 13B) is executed, the development suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (Fig. 13)) suggests that the effect develops from the character SP reach (first stage effect) to the SPSP reach (second stage effect). There are times when (E) and (F)) are performed, and there are times when a non-development suggestion effect (see FIG. 13C) that suggests that the character SP reach does not develop into SPSP reach is performed.

If this non-development suggestion effect is performed, there is no possibility that a hit notification effect will be performed after that, but if a development suggestion effect is performed, a hit notification effect will be performed in the later SPSP reach. (See the flow of (F-4), (I), (H) in FIG. 7, and the column of fluctuation pattern E in FIG. 17). In this way, even if the capture failure effect is performed following the competition effect, there is still a possibility that the hit notification effect will be performed after that, so even if the capture failure effect is performed, the player You can enjoy the game while expecting that the development suggestion production will be performed without losing the hope of the jackpot.

[Specific example of bumping effect in normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a specific example of the bumping effect in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen view showing a specific example of the bumping effect in the normal gaming state.

In FIG. 14A, in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol in a mode indicating that there is a presence is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51. A special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 is shifted to the area 53, and the second hold icon is shifted to the position where the earliest hold icon was displayed. The shift process is performed, and along with this, the high-speed scroll display of the decorative symbol is started (see FIGS. 14A and 14B).

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the abrupt effect is executed.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the start of the high-speed scroll display of the decorative symbol, a darkening effect is performed in which a black effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in full screen (see FIG. 14C). In the present embodiment, this blackout effect is performed during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the elapse of 2 seconds, but the blackout effect causes the screen to become pitch black and the gaming machine. It is possible to make the player feel that 1 has failed.

The darkening effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a black effect image in full screen on the front side of the decorative pattern. Therefore, during the darkening effect, the decorative symbol of the first aspect continues to be displayed in a variable manner, but the decorative symbol cannot be visually recognized (the decorative symbol of the first aspect is not displayed). It should be noted that, with the start of the darkening effect, from the state in which the decorative symbol of the first aspect is variablely displayed, a small decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the second aspect) is displayed in the second aspect during the character SP reach and the SPSP reach. It may be in a state of variable display at a position different from the position where the decorative symbol of No. 1 is displayed (for example, the lower left corner of the performance liquid crystal screen 5).

In addition, this darkening effect may be accompanied by turning off the light emitting element built in the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect object 7. Further, when a darkening effect is performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 to hide the decorative symbol as in the present embodiment, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. be. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a symbol called a fourth symbol, which is different from the decorative symbol, is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the liquid crystal screen 5 to notify that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. A configuration is adopted in which the symbol is continuously displayed in a variable speed at a constant speed during the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win with the stop display of the special symbol. As the fourth symbol, two are separately prepared, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol. The fourth symbol is a small image of the same shape of red, yellow, green, and blue (for example, a square with a side of 5 mm), and these are in the same position in the order of red → yellow → green → blue → red → ... The variable display is performed by displaying in. For example, when the red 4th symbol is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the 1st special symbol, it is a 16R probability variation, and when the yellow 4th symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a 6R probability variation, and the green 4th symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is 6R normal, and when the blue fourth symbol is stopped and displayed, it is lost. The fourth symbol is an image displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is displayed on the front side of the other effect image and is displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized even if the effect accessory 7 is operated, so that a part or all of the design does not become invisible. However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that the interest of the darkening effect may be reduced. Therefore, in another embodiment, instead of displaying the fourth symbol on the liquid crystal screen 5, a fourth symbol lamp (for example, LED) for displaying the fourth symbol is separately provided, and the black color is displayed during the darkening effect. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect image other than the effect image is not displayed.

The fourth symbol and the decorative symbol start the variable display with the variable display of the special symbol, and are stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed is the same as the content (big hit or loss) that the special symbol stops and displays and notifies the player, and is the same as the decorative symbol in this respect. .. However, since the fourth symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol and is displayed in an inconspicuous position and mode, it is a symbol that is difficult for the player to be aware of. In addition, the number of symbols displayed in a variable manner in the fourth symbol is smaller than that in the decorative symbol, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable speed regardless of the type of effect being executed, whereas the decorative symbol has a scroll speed. It can be said that the two display modes are different because the speed becomes slower or faster. The speed at which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols of the first and second aspects scroll at high speed.

Next, following the darkening effect, an effect display in which the three decorative symbols constituting the doublet of "777" suddenly pop out and pseudo-stop in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed, for example, for about 3 seconds (Fig.). 14 (D)). Then, the three decorative symbols of these "777" are stopped as they are, and a hit notification effect for notifying the 16R probability change is performed (see FIG. 14 (E)).

Such a bump effect can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot, but is not executed when the determination result is a loss. Therefore, the hitting effect can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed.

In addition, the hitting effect is an effect that announces a big hit without going through the establishment of reach. For this reason, the decorative design is not displayed small when the bumping effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression of suddenly hitting the character SP reach or SPSP reach, which can be expected to be a big hit, and a high effect can be obtained.

Since the bump effect is an effect that makes the player feel that the jackpot is suddenly notified immediately after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the bump effect is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is preferable that the time required for the bumping effect and the time required for the bumping effect are short, but as long as the time does not deviate significantly from such a condition, the bumping effect is performed after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The time until the start and the time from the start of the abutting effect to the time when the hit notification effect is performed may be different from the time illustrated in the present embodiment.

Further, here, a case where the bumping effect is composed of a darkening effect (see FIG. 14 (C)) and an effect in which doublet appears suddenly (see FIG. 14 (D)) has been described as an example. In another embodiment, the bumping effect that does not include the darkening effect may be performed. That is, as long as the player can be made to feel that the jackpot has suddenly become a big hit, the effect display related to the abrupt effect may be any effect display.

[Specific example of battle reach in the probabilistic game state]
Next, a specific example of the battle reach in the probabilistic gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen view showing a specific example of the battle reach in the probabilistic gaming state.

In FIG. 15A, in a state where three hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52, the judgment result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol in a mode indicating that there is a presence is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as green hold.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol, the second hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. A special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is shifted to the area 53, and the remaining hold icons are shifted to the area 53 side in the second hold icon display area 52. The shift process is performed, and along with this, the high-speed scroll display of the decorative symbol is started (see FIGS. 15A and 15B).

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 16R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y1 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed. In that case, the following effects may be performed.

That is, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the seven symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped in the left column, and the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column as well. A reach-established fanning effect that fuels the player's expectations is performed (see FIG. 15 (C)). This reach establishment fanning effect is an effect of slowly moving the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) showing the same number as the left symbol (7 symbols in this case) from top to bottom in the right column, and the left symbol. When a decorative symbol showing a number common to the above is pseudo-stopped in the right column, reach is established (see FIG. 15 (D)). On the other hand, if a decorative symbol showing a number different from the one on the left stops in the right column, the reach is usually unsuccessful and a loss is notified.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which reach can be established with 7 symbols only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation. In other words, if a reach is established with 7 symbols in the probabilistic game state, a hit notification effect is always performed so that the 7 symbols are aligned. Therefore, the establishment of reach with 7 symbols can be regarded as one of the big hit notices.

Further, here, the case of performing the reach establishment fanning effect for inciting the establishment of the 7 symbol reach has been described as an example, but the same effect is also performed in the case of inciting the reach establishment with other decorative symbols.

When the reach is established as described above, although not shown in FIG. 15, a title display for displaying the reach title related to the battle reach such as "Decisive Battle XXX VS XXX" is performed. During this reach title display, the decorative pattern of the second aspect is displayed. Then, a battle effect showing how the own character and the enemy character battle with each other while the decorative pattern of the second aspect is displayed is started (see FIG. 15 (E)). At that time, the three symbol rows forming the reach move to the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 while being reduced.

Then, at the final stage of the battle reach, an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 26 is performed (see FIG. 15 (F)). Since this operation promotion effect is the same as the operation promotion effect performed during the SPSP reach described above based on FIG. 10 (H), detailed description here will be omitted.

Here, when the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, a victory suggestion effect suggesting that the own character defeats the enemy character and wins is performed (see FIG. 15 (G)). .. In this victory suggestion effect, the characters "Destroy !!" indicating that the character has defeated the enemy character are displayed and the sound is output, and the effect 7 operates while emitting light in rainbow colors. At that time, the three small symbols displayed in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating doublet (see FIG. 15 (G)).

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot, it is preferable to perform the victory suggestion effect regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the player does not operate the button during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect during the battle reach, the victory suggestion effect is performed at the timing when the valid period ends. The configuration is adopted.

When the victory suggestion effect is performed in this way, the three decorative symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed in a large size in a pseudo-stopped state in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 15 (H)). ), With the main stop of the second special symbol, these three decorative symbols are finally stopped (see FIG. 15 (I)).

Here, the case where the reach is established with 7 symbols and the operation promotion effect is performed during the battle reach has been described as an example, but the same effect is also performed when the reach is established with other decorative symbols. However, if the jackpot related to the second special symbol judgment is a probabilistic jackpot, a victory suggestion effect is performed, but if it is a normal jackpot, a defeat suggestion effect showing how the own character is defeated by the enemy character is performed. Will be. That is, even if the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, the victory suggestion effect is not performed, and the defeat suggestion effect is performed instead. When this defeat suggestion effect is performed, three decorative symbols (for example, doublets of even-numbered symbols) indicating a normal jackpot (in this embodiment, 8R normal corresponding to the jackpot symbol Y4) are largely simulated in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. After stopping, it will stop as it is. In this case, after the jackpot game in which the eight long open round games are performed is completed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. That is, it falls from the probabilistic game state.

[Specific example of bumping effect in probabilistic game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a specific example of the bumping effect in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen view showing a specific example of the bumping effect in the probabilistic gaming state.

In FIG. 16A, in a state where three hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52, the judgment result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which the decorative symbol in the mode (here, “246”) indicating that the icon is present is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as red hold.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 51. A special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, shift processing is performed for each hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 51, and variable display (high-speed scroll display) of the decorative symbol is started (FIGS. 16A and 16B). )reference).

Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot and a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the abrupt effect is executed.

Since this bumping effect is partly common to the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state, the common points will be omitted, but immediately after the second special symbol variation display is started. (See FIG. 16 (C)), and the effect 7 operates almost at the same time that the three decorative symbols indicating the doublets of "777" are suddenly displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIG. 16 (D)). Then, a hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols that are pseudo-stopped are stopped as they are (see FIG. 16 (E)).

It should be noted that this bumping effect is a dedicated effect when a probabilistic jackpot is won, similar to the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is usually a big hit or a loss, the hitting effect is not performed. As is clear from this, the hitting effect in the probabilistic game state can be regarded as one of the jackpot notices that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed.

In the present embodiment, three types of probability variation jackpots, 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 4R probability variation, are prepared as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination, and any of the probability variation jackpots is hit. A configuration that can execute a hit effect is adopted. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the hitting effect can be executed when the 16 probability variation is won, while the hitting effect is not executed when the 8R probability variation or the 4R probability variation is won. It may be adopted. Further, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, a configuration capable of executing the bumping effect may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol are the same when the bumping effect is performed will be described, but even if these fluctuation times are different from each other. good. Further, the production mode of the bumping effect performed in the normal gaming state and the production mode of the bumping effect performed in the probabilistic gaming state may be the same as each other or may be different from each other. ..

It should be noted that the production mode of the bumping effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and any production mode may be used as long as the player can feel that a big hit has suddenly occurred. For example, in a part of the case where the 16R probability variation is won as a result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination), even if the bump effect is executed immediately after the reach is established or during the reach effect. good.

For example, in the collision effect immediately after the reach is established, immediately after the reach is established (for example, 0.5 seconds later), a medium symbol showing the same number as the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped suddenly appears on the effective line and is simulated. It may be stopped, and immediately after that, all the decorative symbols may be stopped (all are the decorative symbols of the first aspect). In such a case, it can be said that the hitting effect is a production that becomes a big hit without executing the reach effect even after the reach is established. It should be noted that the bumping effect may be executed almost at the same time as the reach is established. In this case, for example, when the left symbol is pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol showing the same number as the left symbol is suddenly effective almost at the same time as the right symbol showing the same number as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line. It may appear on the line and make a pseudo stop, and immediately after that, all the decorative symbols may be stopped (all are the decorative symbols of the first aspect).

For example, the collision effect during normal reach may be executed when the scroll speed of the medium symbol that has been scrolled and displayed at high speed gradually decreases. For example, when the collision effect is executed during normal reach, the middle symbol showing the same number as the pseudo-stopped reach symbol suddenly appears on the effective line at the timing when the middle symbol starts scrolling slowly downward. The pseudo stop may be performed, and immediately after that, all the decorative symbols may be stopped (all are the decorative symbols of the first aspect). In such a case, it can be said that the hitting effect is an effect that suddenly becomes a big hit with normal reach without developing into character SP reach or SPSP reach.

In addition, for example, in the bumping effect during character SP reach, the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) is displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the own character and the enemy character compete for the treasure chest. It may be executed during the scramble production indicating. For example, when a collision effect is executed during a scramble effect, a medium symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of the second aspect magnified three times) showing the same number as the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It suddenly appears in the center and makes a pseudo stop. Then, the reach symbol is erased, and three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol obtained by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times) are pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pattern-aligned manner, and immediately after that. All decorative symbols may be stopped. In such a case, it can be said that the hitting effect is an effect that suddenly becomes a big hit in the character SP reach without executing the effect executed at the end of the character SP reach and without developing into the SPSP reach.

Further, for example, the bumping effect during battle reach shows a state in which the own character and the enemy character battle with each other in a state where the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) is displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen of the liquid crystal screen 5. It may be executed during the battle production. For example, when the collision effect is executed in the middle of the battle effect, the middle symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the second aspect magnified three times) showing the same number as the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped is displayed on the LCD screen 5. It suddenly appears in the center of the screen and makes a pseudo stop. Then, the reach symbol is erased, and three decorative symbols (for example, a decorative symbol obtained by enlarging the decorative symbol of the second aspect three times) are pseudo-stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a pattern-aligned manner, and immediately after that. All decorative symbols may be stopped. In such a case, it can be said that the hitting effect is an effect that suddenly becomes a big hit in the battle reach without executing the effect executed at the end of the battle reach.

[Variable pattern selection table used in normal game state]
FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state.

The main ROM 102 contains a probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17A) and a normal jackpot variation as reference variation pattern selection tables when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B) and a variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17C) are stored. Here, the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot is used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" in the normal game state. NS. Further, the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "normal jackpot" in the normal game state. .. Further, the variation pattern selection table for reach loss selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is loss and it is determined to perform the effect with reach in the normal game state. Used for processing.

In the explanatory diagrams of the various tables shown in FIGS. 17 and later, the range in which each random number can be taken is set to a range smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate the explanation.

(Variation pattern selection table for probabilistic jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 17A, in the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern random number are associated with each other. In FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, the variation time of the first special symbol, the type of variation effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation effect pattern. The specific contents of the effect, the range in which the variation pattern random numbers can be taken, and the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected are also indicated.

As shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the range in which the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol can be taken is set to "0" to "99". When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the normal game state and selects 16R probability variation or 6R probability variation as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number or the symbol random number is "0" to "0". If it is any of "9", the variation pattern A is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern A from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "10" to "11", the variation pattern B is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern B from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. select. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "12" to "19", the variation pattern C is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern C from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. select. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "20" to "49", the variation pattern D is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern D from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. select. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "50" to "99", the variation pattern E is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern E from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. select.

In the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17A), 10 random values of "0" to "9" are assigned to the variation pattern A. Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern A is selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 10% (= 10/100). Further, since two random values of "10" to "11" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern B, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern B selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 2% (= 2). / 100). Further, since eight random values of "12" to "19" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern C, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern C selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 8% (= 8). / 100). Further, since 30 random values of "20" to "49" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern D, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern D selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 30% (= 30). / 100). Further, since 50 random values of "50" to "99" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern E, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern E selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 50% (= 50). / 100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is executed in the normal game state and selects 6R normal as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random numbers acquired together with the jackpot random numbers and the symbol random numbers are "0" to "3". If any of the above, the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern B from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B). If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "4" to "14", the variation pattern C is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern C from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. select. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "15" to "46", the variation pattern D is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern D from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. select. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "47" to "99", the variation pattern E is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern E from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table. select.

In the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B), four random values of "0" to "3" are assigned to the variation pattern B. Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern B is selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 4% (= 4/100). Further, since 11 random values of "4" to "14" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern C, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern C selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 11% (= 11). / 100). Further, since 32 random values of "15" to "46" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern D, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern D selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 32% (= 32). / 100). Further, since 53 random values of "47" to "99" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern E, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern E selected in the case of a normal jackpot is 53% (= 53). / 100).

(Variable pattern selection table for reach loss)
When the main CPU 101 determines in the first special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not executed, whether or not to perform the reach production based on the reach random numbers acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. select. Specifically, whether to select one of the fluctuation patterns from the fluctuation pattern group in which the effect with reach is performed, or to select one of the fluctuation patterns from the fluctuation pattern group in which the effect without reach is performed. decide. Here, when it is selected to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17C).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not executed in the normal game state and selects to perform the effect with reach, the variable pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the reach random number is "0" to If it is any of "39", the variation pattern G is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern G from the reach loss variation pattern selection table. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "40" to "69", the variation pattern H is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern H from the reach loss variation pattern selection table. do. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "70" to "89", the variation pattern I is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern I from the reach loss variation pattern selection table. do. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "90" to "99", the variation pattern J is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern J from the reach loss variation pattern selection table. do.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 17C), 40 random values of “0” to “39” are assigned to the variation pattern G. Therefore, the rate at which the variation pattern G is selected when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified is 40% (= 40/100). Further, since 30 random values of "40" to "69" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern H, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern H is selected when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified is determined. It is 30% (= 30/100). Further, since 20 random values of "70" to "89" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern I, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern I is selected when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified is determined. It is 20% (= 20/100). Further, since 10 random values of "90" to "99" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern J, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern J is selected when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified is determined. It is 10% (= 10/100).

The main CPU 101 refers to any of the variation pattern selection tables exemplified in FIG. 17 based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination. Then, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the plurality of fluctuation patterns.

Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table for loss without reach, which is used when notifying the loss without performing the reach effect, is also prepared, and the main CPU 101 must execute the jackpot game. When the judgment is made and the non-reach effect is selected, the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and the fluctuation time is 8 seconds, depending on the number of holds when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. Select one of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds.

Further, as is clear from the comparison of the fluctuation pattern selection tables of FIGS. 17A to 17C, the fluctuation time when each fluctuation pattern is selected and the effect content correspond to each other except for the fluctuation pattern A. .. For example, the variation pattern B is selected from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern B is selected from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table, and the variation pattern G is selected from the reach loss variation pattern selection table. In the case where the special symbol is changed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20 seconds, and only the normal reach is performed as the reach effect, which is common to each other. The reason why such a configuration is adopted is that the effects up to immediately before the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed are standardized, and the subsequent effects are made according to the determination result.

On the other hand, in the other embodiment, even if the three selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C) have the same effect contents up to immediately before the winning notification, they are mutually exclusive. The fluctuation time may be different.

From the description of the three variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 17, the following can be said. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, it tends to be easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, and it is difficult to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (Fig.). 17 (A) and (B)). Further, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost and the reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, and it tends to be easy to select the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (Fig.). 17 (C)). From these facts, it can be said that the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the hit notification effect, and conversely, the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the loss notification effect. In other words, when the reach effect is performed over a relatively long time, such as developing from the normal reach to the SPSP reach via the character SP reach, the hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and only the normal reach effect is performed. When the time required for the reach effect is relatively short, it can be said that the loss notification effect is likely to be executed. In other words, it is better to develop from normal reach to character SP reach or SPSP reach, or to develop from normal reach to SPSP reach via character SP reach, instead of notifying the winner in the normal reach production. , It can be said that the jackpot reliability is high.

<About the bumping effect in the normal game state>
The following can be said about the bumping effect that is performed in the normal game state. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot, the rate at which the collision effect is executed is 10%, which is the same as the rate at which the variation pattern A is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. (= 10/100). On the other hand, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table and the reach loss variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern in which the bumping effect is performed is not prepared (see FIGS. 17B and 17C).
From these facts, the hitting effect in the normal game state is a big hit notice that definitively announces that the big hit game will be executed, and also gives a notice that the game will always shift to the probabilistic game state after the big hit game is completed. It can be said that it is a probable change jackpot notice. That is, in the present embodiment, when the hitting effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state (here, 100%) after the jackpot game is completed is that the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. It is characterized by being higher than the probability (0%).

Further, in the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17 (A)), when focusing on the variation pattern A having the shortest variation time of 5 seconds, the impact effect is associated with the effect content. No other effect is associated. From this, it is clear that when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination becomes the probability variation jackpot and the fluctuation pattern A is selected, the bump effect that functions as the probability variation jackpot notice is executed with a 100% probability. Is.

The ratio of the probability variation jackpot to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 60% (= 5% + 55%) (see FIG. 6B). Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the rate at which the hitting effect is executed is 10% (= 10/100). Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the hitting effect is executed is 6% (= 0.6 × 0.1 × 100). ..

In the present embodiment, if the hitting effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the case where the game shifts to the probabilistic gaming state with a 100% probability after the jackpot game ends will be described, but in other embodiments, the hitting effect is described. When is executed, the probability of transitioning to the probabilistic game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a value of less than 100%, so that the game can be controlled in the time-saving game state with a certain probability (for example, 20%) after the end of the jackpot game. You may. In this case, when the abrupt effect is executed, the probability of transitioning to the probabilistic gaming state may be higher than the probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, these probabilities may be the same, or the probabilistic gaming state may be the same. The probability of transitioning to the state may be lower than the probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the bumping effect is always executed when the variation pattern A is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the bumping effect is not executed even if the variation pattern A is selected. You may adopt the configuration that there is. That is, the probability that the bump effect is executed when the variation pattern A is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the fluctuation pattern A is selected and the hitting effect is executed is set to a value higher than the probability that another fluctuation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relations of these probabilities may be reversed.

Further, the hitting effect is an effect that functions as a probability change jackpot notice, and in the present embodiment, a 16R jackpot game is executed and a 6R jackpot game is executed after the hitting effect is executed. There are cases. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the bumping effect is executed, the 16R jackpot game is executed, but the 6R jackpot game is not executed. May be good. In other words, in the case of 16R probability variation, the bumping effect may be executed, and in the case of 6R probability variation, the bumping effect may not be executed.

<About successful capture production>
In the present embodiment, the character SP reach may be executed in the normal gaming state, while the character SP reach is not executed in the probabilistic gaming state. For this reason, the successful capture effect (see, for example, FIG. 13 (H)) that may be executed during the character SP reach can be said to be a dedicated effect dedicated to the normal game state, which is not performed in the probabilistic game state. can. The following can be said about the successful capture production, which is a dedicated production in the normal game state.

When the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot, the ratio of the variation pattern C for which the capture success effect is performed is selected from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17 (A)) is 8% (=). 8/100). Further, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a normal jackpot, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern C for which the capture success effect is performed is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table for the normal jackpot (see FIG. 17B) is 11%. (= 11/100). Further, in the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17C), although the variation pattern H in which the capture failure effect is performed is prepared, the variation pattern in which the capture success effect is performed is not prepared. This also applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss and the non-reach effect is performed.
From these facts, it can be said that the successful capture production is a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed.

Further, as is clear from the notation of the variation pattern selection table for probabilistic jackpot (see FIG. 17 (A)) and the variation pattern selection table for normal jackpot (see FIG. 17 (B)), the successful capture effect is the first special. It is feasible in both the case where the jackpot related to the symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot and the case where it is a normal jackpot. That is, when the hit notification effect is performed following the capture success effect, the game may be controlled in the probabilistic game state or the game may be controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game ends. From this, it can be said that the successful capture production is a production that foretells that the jackpot game will be executed, but does not suggest the game state after the jackpot game is completed. At the stage when the successful capture production is performed, the player cannot determine whether the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state or the normal game state after the jackpot game ends, so that the game is played in the probabilistic game state. You can enjoy the game while expecting that is controlled.

The ratio of the probability variation jackpot to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 60%, and the variation pattern in which the capture success effect is performed with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17 (A)). The rate at which C is selected is 8%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the successful capture effect is performed and the jackpot game is completed is 4.8% (= 0.6 × 0.08 × 100).
On the other hand, the ratio of the normal jackpot to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is 40%, and the fluctuation pattern in which the successful capture is performed with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table for the normal jackpot (see FIG. 17B). The percentage of C selected is 11%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the normal game state after the successful capture effect is performed and the jackpot game is completed is 4.4% (= 0.4 × 0.11 × 100).
From these things, when the capture success effect is executed, the game may be controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, or the game may be controlled in the normal game state, but the probability of the former Is slightly higher than the latter probability.

Further, in the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 17 (A)), when focusing on the variation pattern C in which the variation time is 40 seconds, the capture success effect is associated with the effect content, while the capture is performed. There is no production that is not associated with a success effect. From this, it is clear that when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment becomes a probability variation jackpot and the fluctuation pattern C is selected, the capture success effect that functions as a jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. be.

Further, in the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 17B), when focusing on the fluctuation pattern C in which the fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the capture success effect is associated with the effect content, while the capture is performed. There is no production that is not associated with a success effect. From this, it is clear that even when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a normal jackpot and the fluctuation pattern C is selected, the capture success effect that functions as a jackpot notice is executed with a 100% probability. be.

In this embodiment, the case where the capture success effect is always executed when the variation pattern C is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the capture success effect is not executed even if the variation pattern C is selected. You may adopt the configuration that there is. That is, the probability that the capture success effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern C is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Further, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the capture success effect is executed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, while the capture success effect is not executed in the case of a normal jackpot. That is, the successful capture effect may be a dedicated effect for the probabilistic jackpot, as in the case of the abrupt effect of the present embodiment. On the contrary, a configuration may be adopted in which the successful capture effect is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, but the successful capture effect is not executed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot.

[Variable pattern selection table used in the probabilistic game state]
FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a probability variation game state.

The main ROM 102 contains a probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18A) and a normal jackpot variation as reference variation pattern selection tables when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the probability variation game state. A pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B) is stored. Here, the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot is used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" in the probability variation game state. NS. Further, the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table is used for processing to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "normal jackpot" in the probability variation game state. .. A variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost is also prepared, but the illustration is omitted.

(Variation pattern selection table for probabilistic jackpot)
As illustrated in FIG. 18A, in the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the variation pattern random number are associated with each other. In FIG. 18, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and the variation pattern random number, the variation time of the second special symbol, the type of the variation effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 131 for each variation pattern, and the variation effect pattern. The specific contents of the effect, the range in which the variation pattern random numbers can be taken, and the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected are also indicated.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the range in which the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol can be taken is set to "0" to "99". When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the probability variation game state and selects 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 4R probability variation as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number or the symbol random number is ". If it is any of "0" to "29", the variation pattern L is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern L from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "30" to "79", the variation pattern M is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern M from the variation pattern selection table for the probability variation jackpot. select. If the acquired variation pattern random number is any of "80" to "99", the variation pattern N is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern N from the probability variation jackpot variation pattern selection table. select.

In the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 18A), 30 random values of "0" to "29" are assigned to the variation pattern L. Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern L is selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 30% (= 30/100). Further, since 50 random values of "30" to "79" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern M, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern M selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 50% (= 50). / 100). Further, since 20 random values of "80" to "99" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern N, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern N selected in the case of a probability variation jackpot is 20% (= 20). / 100).

(Normal jackpot variation pattern selection table)
When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed in the probability variation game state and selects 8R normal as the jackpot type, the variation pattern random numbers acquired together with the jackpot random numbers and the symbol random numbers are "0" to "99". If any of the above, the variation pattern O is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol by reading the variation pattern O from the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B). In the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal jackpots (see FIG. 18B), 100 random values from "0" to "99" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern O, so that when it is a normal jackpot, The rate at which the variation pattern O is selected is 100% (= 100/100).

When the main CPU 101 determines in the second special symbol determination that the jackpot game is to be executed, the main CPU 101 selects one of the variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIG. 18 according to the type of jackpot. Refer to it and select one of the fluctuation patterns from the plurality of fluctuation patterns.

<About the bumping effect in the probabilistic game state>
The following can be said about the bumping effect performed in the probabilistic game state. That is, the rate at which the collision effect is executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is the probability variation jackpot is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 18A). It is 30% (= 30/100), which is the same as the selected ratio. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18 (B)), the variation pattern in which the bump effect is performed is not prepared (see FIG. 18 (B)). This also applies to the variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is lost. From these facts, the abrupt effect in the probabilistic game state is a big hit notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed, and also announces that the probabilistic game state will always be entered after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that it is a probable change jackpot notice.

Further, in the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 18A), when focusing on the variation pattern L having the shortest variation time of 5 seconds, the impact effect is associated with the effect content. No other effect is associated. From this, it is clear that when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination becomes the probability variation jackpot and the fluctuation pattern L is selected, the bump effect that functions as the probability variation jackpot notice is executed with a probability of 100%. Is.

It should be noted that the ratio of the probability variation jackpot to the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 60%, and the ratio of the hitting effect being executed in the case of the probability variation jackpot is 30% as described above. Therefore, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the hitting effect is executed is 18% (= 0.6 × 0.3 × 100). ..

In the present embodiment, if the hitting effect is executed in the probabilistic game state, the case where the game shifts to the probability changing game state with a 100% probability after the jackpot game ends will be described, but in other embodiments, the hitting effect is described. When is executed, the probability of transitioning to the probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game ends may be set to a value of less than 100% so that the game can be controlled in the normal gaming state after the jackpot game ends. In this case, when the abrupt effect is executed, the probability of transitioning to the probabilistic gaming state may be higher than the probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, these probabilities may be the same, or the probabilistic gaming state may be the same. The probability of transitioning to the state may be lower than the probability of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the bumping effect is always executed when the variation pattern L is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the bumping effect is not executed even if the variation pattern L is selected. You may adopt the configuration that there is. That is, the probability that the bumping effect is executed when the variation pattern L is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the fluctuation pattern L is selected and the hitting effect is executed is set to a value higher than the probability that another fluctuation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. However, in other embodiments, the magnitude relations of these probabilities may be reversed.

<About the resurrection production>
As is clear from the notation of FIG. 18 (A), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a probability variation jackpot, a revival effect (see FIG. 8 (J)) is executed as a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Fluctuation pattern N may be selected. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is usually a big hit, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 18 (B), the variation pattern in which the revival effect is performed is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Will not be done. This also applies to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss. From these facts, it can be said that the revival effect performed in the probabilistic game state is a probabilistic jackpot notice as well as the abrupt effect.

Further, when the variation pattern L is selected, the bumping effect is executed, but the revival effect is not executed. Further, when the variation pattern N is selected, the revival effect is executed, but the abrupt effect is not executed. From these facts, it can be said that the rush effect and the revival effect in the probabilistic game state are prohibited so that both are not performed within the same fluctuation.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, for example, at the end of SPSP reach, it is possible to perform a revival effect in which three decorative symbols with a uniform pattern are pseudo-stopped after pretending to be lost even in a normal game state. This revival effect is subject to the same prohibition as in the probabilistic game state so that when the variation pattern A is selected, it is not executed together with the collision effect within the same variation.

The ratio of the probability variation jackpot to the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is 60%, and the variation pattern N in which the revival effect is performed with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 18A). Is selected at 20%. Therefore, the probability that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the revival effect is performed and the jackpot game is completed is 12% (= 0.6 × 0.2 × 100).
On the other hand, with reference to the variation pattern selection table for probabilistic jackpot (see FIG. 18A), the rate at which the variation pattern L on which the bumping effect is performed is selected is 30%. Therefore, the probability that the hitting effect is performed and the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed is 18% (= 0.6 × 0.3 × 100).
From these facts, it can be said that the probability that the abrupt effect is executed is higher than the probability that the revival effect is executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the case where the revival effect is always executed when the variation pattern N is selected will be described, but in other embodiments, the revival effect may not be executed even if the variation pattern N is selected. May be adopted. That is, the probability that the revival effect is executed when the variation pattern N is selected is not limited to 100%, and may be a value less than 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the fluctuation pattern N is selected and the revival effect is executed is set to a value higher than the probability that another fluctuation pattern is selected and another jackpot notice is executed. , In other embodiments, the magnitude relations of these probabilities may be reversed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the revival effect is always executed when the variation pattern N is selected regardless of the type of the probability variation jackpot in the probability variation game state will be described, but in other embodiments, the 16R probability variation will be described. If this is the case, the revival effect can be executed, but if it is an 8R probability variation or a 4R probability variation, the revival effect may not be executed. That is, the revival effect may function as a special jackpot notice for the 16R probability change.

[7 About reliability of symbol reach (normal game state)]
FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the normal gaming state. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for normal loss, which is referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “loss”.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the same decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and the right column and a reach is established, a predetermined reach effect is performed, but the above-mentioned "final reach symbol" is a hit notification effect. Alternatively, it refers to the reach symbol displayed in the reach effect performed immediately before the loss notification effect is performed. For example, when the normal reach is performed and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed, the reach symbol displayed during the normal reach corresponds to the final reach symbol. In addition, when the normal reach develops into the SPSP reach via the character SP reach, and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed following this SPSP reach, the reach symbol displayed during this SPSP reach effect. Corresponds to the final reach symbol.

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, the sub CPU 131 normally sets the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the loss reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19 (A)).

In the present embodiment, the range in which the reach symbol selection random number can be taken is set to "0" to "99". In the reach symbol selection table for normal loss (see FIG. 19 (A)), 12 random values are set for each of 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols. Assigned. Further, 10 random values are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random values are assigned to 7 symbols. Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is lost, the ratio of selecting 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, or 9 symbols as the final reach symbol is 12%. (= 12/100), the ratio of 3 symbols selected is 10% (= 10/100), and the ratio of 7 symbols selected is 6% (= 6/100).

FIG. 19B is a diagram showing a normal 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”. ..

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the sub CPU 131 usually selects the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the time 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19 (B)).

In the normal 16R probability variation jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19 (B)), 44 random values are assigned to 7 symbols, and 7 random values are assigned to all other decorative symbols. Numerical values are assigned. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the ratio of 7 symbols selected as the final reach symbol is 44% (= 44/100), and other decorative symbols are selected. The ratio is 7% (= 7/100).

FIG. 19C is a diagram showing a normal time 6R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “6R normal”. ..

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the sub CPU 131 normally selects the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. Time 6R The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for normal jackpot (see FIG. 19C).

In the normal time 6R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19C), random numbers are not assigned to odd symbols. This is because the odd-numbered symbol functions as a probabilistic symbol. On the other hand, 25 random numbers are assigned to even-numbered symbols. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal, the ratio of selecting even-numbered symbols is 25% (= 25/100), and the ratio of selecting odd-numbered symbols is 0. %.

The following can be said from the reach symbol selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 19A to 19C. That is, in the reach symbol selection table for normal loss (see FIG. 19 (A)), 6 random values are assigned to 7 symbols, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss". In this case, 7 symbols are selected as the reach symbols at a rate of 6%. This means that even if the reach is established with the seven symbols, the loss notification effect may be performed later.
On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "6R normal", the seven symbols are not selected as the reach symbols (see FIG. 19C), but the determination of the first special symbol determination. When the result is "16R probability variation", 7 symbols are selected as the reach symbols at a high rate of 44%.
In this way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", 7 symbols are easily selected as the reach symbol, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". Since it is difficult to select 7 symbols as the reach symbols, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach in which the reach is established with the 7 symbols in the normal game state is a production with relatively high jackpot reliability. In the case of "16R probability variation", 7 symbols may be selected as the reach symbols without fail.

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 19B, even-numbered symbols or odd-numbered symbols other than 7 symbols may be selected as the reach symbol even if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation. However, when these reach symbols are selected, the above-mentioned promotion effect (first half) and promotion success effect are performed based on FIG. 11, and finally, the hit notification effect in which the doublets of "777" are aligned. Is done. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 11B, even if three decorative symbols other than the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped, the player can enjoy the game without losing the expectation for the 16R probability variation jackpot. ..

[About the reliability of 7 symbol reach (probability change game state)]
FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reliability of the reach symbol in the probabilistic gaming state. FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for probabilistic loss that is referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “loss”.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reach effect other than the battle reach is not performed in the probabilistic gaming state, the reach symbol displayed during the battle reach corresponds to the final reach symbol in the probabilistic gaming state.

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss, the sub CPU 131 is probabilistically changing the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the loss reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (A)).

In the reach symbol selection table for loss during probabilistic change (see FIG. 20 (A)), 15 random values are assigned to each of 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols. .. Further, 5 random values are assigned to each of the 3 symbols and the 5 symbols. A random number value is not assigned to the 7 symbols. Therefore, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is lost, the ratio of selecting 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, 8 symbols, or 9 symbols as the final reach symbol is 15% (= 15). / 100), the ratio of selecting 3 or 5 symbols is 5% (= 5/100), and the ratio of selecting 7 symbols is 0% (= 0/100).

FIG. 19B is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for 16R probability variation jackpot during probability variation referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “16R probability variation”. ..

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the sub CPU 131 probabilistically changes the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the reach symbol selection table for medium 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 20 (B)).

In the reach symbol selection table for 16R probability variation jackpot during probability variation (see FIG. 20 (B)), 50 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols, and 16 random values are assigned to 3 symbols. 10 random values are assigned to 5 symbols. Then, four random numbers are assigned to each of the other reach symbols. Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, the ratio of selecting 7 symbols as the final reach symbol is 50% (= 50/100), and the ratio of selecting 3 symbols is 16% (= 16/100), 5 symbols are selected at 10% (= 10/100), and other decorative symbols are selected at 4% (= 4 /). 100).

FIG. 20C is a diagram showing a reach symbol selection table for a probabilistic 8R normal jackpot that is referred to for determining the final reach symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “8R normal”. ..

The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number is probabilistically changed. The final reach symbol is selected by reading from the medium 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (C)).

In the reach symbol selection table for 8R normal jackpot during probabilistic change (see FIG. 20C), a random number value is not assigned to an odd number symbol. On the other hand, 40 random numbers are assigned to the four symbols, and 20 random values are assigned to each of the other even symbols. Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 8R normal, the ratio of selecting 4 symbols is 40% (= 40/100), and the ratio of selecting other even symbols is any. It is 20% (= 20/100), and the ratio of odd-numbered symbols selected is 0%.

The following can be said from the reach symbol selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (C). That is, in the probabilistic 8R normal jackpot reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 20 (C)), although random values are not assigned to the 7 symbols, the probabilistic 16R probabilistic jackpot reach symbol selection table (FIG. 20 (Fig. 20) In B)), 50 random values are assigned to the 7 symbols. Then, in the reach symbol selection table for loss during probabilistic change (see FIG. 20A), random numbers are not assigned to the seven symbols.
From these facts, when the reach is established with 7 symbols in the probabilistic game state, the loss is not notified after that, and the hit notification effect that the 3 decorative symbols showing doublets of "777" are finally stopped. Is done. In this sense, the 7-symbol reach, in which the reach is established with 7 symbols in the probabilistic game state, can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed, and the 7 symbols are aligned. Since is a special production of 16R probability change, it can be said that the 7 symbol reach in the probability change game state is a notice of probability change jackpot.

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 20B, even-numbered symbols or odd-numbered symbols other than the 7 symbols may be selected as the reach symbol even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is 16R probability variation. However, when these reach symbols are selected, a promotion effect similar to the promotion effect performed in the normal gaming state is performed, and finally, a hit notification effect in which the odd numbers of "777" are aligned is performed. It is said.

[7 Changes in the reliability of symbol reach]
As is clear from the explanation regarding the 7 symbol reach based on FIG. 19, the 7 symbol reach in the normal gaming state can be executed regardless of whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit". Although the jackpot reliability is relatively high, the jackpot reliability is less than 100%. On the other hand, as is clear from the explanation regarding the 7 symbol reach based on FIG. 20, the 7 symbol reach in the probabilistic game state is feasible when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit". However, it is a production with 100% jackpot reliability, which is not executed in the case of "loss". As is clear from these facts, even if the same 7 symbol reach is used, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the game state, and the game state changes from the normal game state to the probabilistic game state, so that the 7 symbol reach can be achieved. The jackpot reliability changes from a value less than 100% to 100%.

The 7 symbol reach as a jackpot notice with a jackpot reliability of 100% is a dedicated effect in the probabilistic game state, and in the normal game state, a jackpot notice (for example, a hit effect) different from the 7 symbol reach is performed. Will be.

[About various jackpot notices]
Hereinafter, various jackpot notices that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23 and 25 to 28. Here, FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various jackpot notices. FIG. 22 is a screen view showing a specific example of the premier character production. FIG. 23 is a screen view showing a specific example of the rainbow-colored title display. FIG. 25 is a screen view showing a specific example of rainbow-colored character display. FIG. 26 is a screen view showing a specific example of the cut-in performed according to the operation. FIG. 27 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1 showing a specific example of one notification. FIG. 28 is a screen view illustrating how the premier character production is performed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a premier character production and a rainbow-colored title display as a jackpot notice, in addition to the above-mentioned collision effect and capture success effect in the normal game state, the collision effect in the probabilistic game state, and 7 symbol reach. , Iridescent cut-in, iridescent character display, and one-shot announcement can be performed.

<Overview of Premier Character Production>
The premier character effect (see FIG. 22) is an effect of displaying an effect image showing a specific character (hereinafter referred to as “premier character”) on the liquid crystal screen 5 and outputting the sound of the premier character from the speaker 24. FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which a raccoon dog character is displayed as a premier character and the raccoon dog character emits a voice saying "Do your best !!". This premier character production has a plurality of execution timings within the same fluctuation, and is executed, for example, during the competition production in the character SP reach (see FIG. 22 (A)) or during the SPSP reach (see FIG. 22 (B)). It is possible. In addition, this premier character does not appear when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "missing".

The type of premier character is not limited to one type, but multiple types of premier characters can be prepared and one of the premier characters can be displayed, or multiple premier characters can be displayed at the same time. May be good. Further, the premier character may be any character as long as it does not appear when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing".

<Overview of rainbow-colored title display>
The rainbow-colored title display (see FIG. 23) is an effect of displaying the reach title displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in rainbow-colored characters when a specific reach effect such as the character SP reach or SPSP reach is started. This rainbow-colored title display also has a plurality of execution timings within the same fluctuation. In FIG. 23 (A), the reach title "Regain the treasure chest!" Is displayed in rainbow-colored characters prior to the start of the scramble production (see FIG. 7 (F-1)) in the character SP reach. The state of being done is illustrated. FIG. 23 (B) illustrates how the reach title “Destroy the enemy boss!” Is displayed in rainbow-colored characters at the start of SPSP reach.

If this rainbow-colored title is not displayed when a specific reach effect such as character SP reach or SPSP reach is started, the reach title is displayed in blue characters or the reach title is displayed in red characters. The red title displayed in is displayed (see FIG. 24). FIG. 24 is a screen view showing specific examples of the blue title display and the red title display. In the blue title display illustrated in FIGS. 24 (A) and 24 (C), the reach title is displayed in blue characters, and in the red title display illustrated in FIGS. 24 (B) and (D), the reach title is displayed in red characters. Is displayed. All of the above three types of title displays are images that are displayed on the entire screen, and are images that have a wide display area with respect to the entire screen.

Here, the blue title display is a title display indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 10%), and the red title display indicates that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. It is a title display (for example, jackpot reliability 30%). These two types of title display (blue title display and red title display) can be executed in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the case where the determination result is "missing". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored title display can be executed with a certain probability when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", but the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". It differs from the above two types of title display in that it is not executed in some cases.

In the present embodiment, the case where the title display itself is performed in the normal gaming state but not in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. However, even in the probabilistic gaming state, for example, the same title display and the rainbow are targeted for battle reach. The color title may be displayed. Further, the color of the title display functioning as a jackpot notice is not limited to rainbow color, and may be, for example, gold. In addition, a specific pattern may be displayed around the title to function as a jackpot notice.

Before displaying the title display, the blue title display, the red title display, and the rainbow-colored title display are displayed in such a manner that the display area for the entire screen is small, and then these images are scrolled to display any title. You may perform an effect that makes you expect that it will actually be displayed.

<Overview of rainbow-colored character display>
The rainbow-colored character display (see FIG. 25) displays characters (for example, lyrics displayed when a specific song is being played) displayed during a specific reach effect such as character SP reach or SPSP reach. It is a production that is displayed in color. FIG. 25A shows how the characters displayed during the scramble production in the character SP reach are displayed in rainbow colors. Further, FIG. 25B shows how the characters displayed during SPSP reach are displayed in rainbow colors.

If the rainbow-colored characters are not displayed, the blue characters may be displayed in blue during the reach effect, or the blue characters may be displayed in red during the reach effect. Here, the blue character display is an effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, the jackpot reliability is 15%), and the red character display is an effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. (For example, jackpot reliability 40%). The character display of these two types of colors can be executed in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the case where the determination result is "missing". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored character display can be executed with a certain probability when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", but the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". It differs from the above two types of character display in that it is not executed in some cases.

In the present embodiment, the case where the character display itself is performed in the normal gaming state but not in the probabilistic gaming state will be described, but even in the probabilistic gaming state, for example, the same blue character display for battle reach, Red characters and rainbow characters may be displayed. Further, the color of the character display functioning as a jackpot notice is not limited to the rainbow color, and may be, for example, gold.

<Overview of rainbow-colored cut-in>
The rainbow-colored cut-in (see FIG. 26) is an effect of performing the above-mentioned operation-corresponding effect using the rainbow-colored effect image based on FIG. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, at the final stage of the SPSP reach, the above-mentioned operation promotion effect is performed based on FIG. 10 (H) (see FIG. 26 (A)). On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the valid period, a blue cut-in image in which a blue effect is applied to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is superimposed and displayed (Fig. 26 (B)) is performed, and a red cut-in (see FIG. 26 (C)) is performed in which a cut-in image in which a red effect is applied is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. There are cases. Here, the blue cut-in is said to have a jackpot reliability of 10%, while the red cut-in is said to have a jackpot reliability of 60%. Based on the difference between the color of the effect associated with the cut-in image and the number of characters contained in the cut-in image, players are more likely to hit the red cut-in than the blue cut-in. It is possible to easily recognize that.

Note that these blue cut-in and red cut-in can be executed in both cases where the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "big hit" and "missing", and the blue cut-in is the first. It is easy to execute when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "missing", and difficult to execute when the judgment result is "big hit". On the contrary, the red cut-in has a feature that it is easy to be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and difficult to be executed when the determination result is "missing". Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots, 16R probability variation, 6R probability variation, and 6R normal, are prepared as jackpots related to the first special symbol determination, but the blue cut-in and the red cut-in are , When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", it can be executed regardless of the type of these big hits. In the case of a loss, a blue cut-in may always be executed, and in the case of a big hit, a red cut-in or a blue cut-in may be executed.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", when the player operates the up key or the down key of the effect key 27, the rainbow-colored cut-in (see FIG. 26 (D)). ) May be performed. This rainbow-colored cut-in is an effect of superimposing a cut-in image with a rainbow-colored effect on the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 26 (A), the effect button. This is an effect that does not occur unless the player operates the up key or the down key within the valid period in the situation where the operation promotion effect for encouraging the operation of 26 is performed.

When the sub CPU 131 acquires information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation" from the game control board 100 and sets an effect pattern for performing an operation promotion effect during SPSP reach. Also sets whether to operate the up key or the down key to generate the rainbow-colored cut-in. For example, it may be set to generate a rainbow-colored cut-in when the up key is operated, while generating a blue cut-in or a red cut-in when the down key is operated. Further, for example, it may be set to generate a blue cut-in or a red cut-in when the up key is operated, and to generate a rainbow-colored cut-in when the down key is operated.

The rainbow-colored cut-in may be executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability variation", but may be executed when the judgment result is "missing". No. Therefore, the jackpot reliability of the rainbow-colored cut-in is 100%.

Further, the rainbow-colored cut-in in the present embodiment is a dedicated effect regarding the 16R probability variation. Therefore, even if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "big hit", if the type is "6R probability change" or "6R normal" which is not "16R probability change", the up key is within the valid period. Alternatively, even if the down key is operated, the rainbow-colored cut-in does not occur. Therefore, even if the rainbow-colored cut-in does not occur in response to the operation of the up key or the down key, the player can enjoy the game while expecting "6R probability change" or "6R normal".

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the cut-in in any one of the plurality of production modes, and the cut-in of any one of the plurality of production modes (the present embodiment). Then, "rainbow color cut-in") can be executed as a big hit notice.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the gaming machine 1 may execute a blue cut-in, a red cut-in, or a rainbow-colored cut-in. That is, in the case of a jackpot, any of the three cut-ins can be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, there are times when the blue cut-in is executed and times when the red cut-in is executed, but there is no time when the rainbow-colored cut-in is executed. .. This is why the rainbow-colored cut-in functions as a jackpot notice that definitively announces the execution of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", and 100% if the key assigned by the sub CPU 131 of the up key and the down key is operated within the valid period. A case where a rainbow-colored cut-in occurs with a probability will be described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, in the above situation, when the assigned key is operated, a production lottery using a random number for determining whether or not to generate a rainbow-colored cut-in is performed. Is executed, and the rainbow-colored cut-in may be generated only when this effect lottery is won. The winning probability may be set to, for example, 50%. In this way, even if the necessary conditions for generating the iridescent cut-in were satisfied, the iridescent cut-in did not occur by preventing the iridescent cut-in from occurring at a constant rate. Even in that case, the player can continue to have the desire of "16R probability change".

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the left key or the right key of the effect key 27 is operated during the valid period of the operation promotion effect of FIG. 26 (A), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is obtained. On condition that it is "16R probability change", one notification (see FIG. 27) described later may occur.

In the present embodiment, a case where a rainbow-colored cut-in is performed using a cut-in image in which a rainbow-colored effect is applied to a production image including three characters will be described, but it is used for a cut-in functioning as a jackpot notice. The display mode of the cut-in image is not limited to this. In another embodiment, for example, a cut-in that displays a cut-in image showing golden characters may be executed as a jackpot notice.

Further, with respect to the configuration in which the first effect mode and the second effect mode perform a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes, in another embodiment, a step-up effect is performed as a predetermined effect. Can be considered. This step-up effect is an effect that can be gradually developed up to a predetermined number of steps (for example, "5") up to a step of a predetermined number of steps or less, and finally develops to any of steps 1 to 4. The step-up effect to be performed may be executed as a reliability suggestion effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot, and the step-up effect that finally develops to step 5 may be executed as a jackpot notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the configuration in which the cut-in occurs at the end of the SPSP reach is adopted, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively short so that the SPSP reach is not performed is selected. If so, no cut-in will occur. On the other hand, in other embodiments, a configuration in which a cut-in can occur at a timing other than the final stage of SPSP reach is adopted, and for example, in a fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern A or fluctuation pattern B, in which the fluctuation time is relatively short. A rainbow-colored cut-in may occur when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

(Summary of one announcement)
The one notification (see FIG. 27) outputs a special effect sound that is not output when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "missing" from the speaker 24, and emits the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 in rainbow colors. It is a production that makes you let.

In the present embodiment, this one-shot notification is an effect performed in the probabilistic gaming state, but in other embodiments, the one-shot notification may be performed even in the normal gaming state.

[Specific example of premier character production in the probabilistic game state]
FIG. 28 is a screen view illustrating how the premier character production is performed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation. In FIG. 28A, in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 52, the judgment result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is lost. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol in a mode indicating that there is a presence is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as red hold.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol, the second hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52. A special symbol determination is executed. In response to this, the shift processing of each hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 52 is performed, and the high-speed scroll display of the decorative symbol is started (see FIGS. 28A and 28B). ..

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the icon shifted to the area 53 is 8R probability variation, that is, the second special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol Y2 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed. In that case, the following effects may be performed.

That is, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the reach that fuels the player's expectation that 3 symbols will be pseudo-stopped in the left column and 7 symbols will be pseudo-stopped in the right column as well. The establishment is performed (see FIG. 28 (C)). A premier character production may be performed while this reach establishment fanning production is being performed. In FIG. 28C, a production image showing a girl's character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and a premier character production is performed in which the voice of the girl's character "Ganbare! Ganbare!" Is output from the speaker 24. The situation is illustrated. Here, a character different from the premier character (raccoon dog character) appearing in the premier character production performed in the normal game state is displayed, but a character common to the character displayed in the premier character production in the normal game state. May be displayed. This also applies to the case where the premier character production is executed at an execution timing other than the reach establishment fanning production.

In this way, after the premier character production is performed along with the reach establishment fanning effect, the reach is established when the decorative symbol common to the left symbol is pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 28 (D)). When the reach is established, a title display that displays the reach title related to the battle reach, such as "Decisive Battle XXX VS XXX", is displayed, but in this case as well, a premier character production may be performed (Fig. 28 (Fig. 28 (Fig. 28)). E) See). In addition, in FIG. 28 (E), the specific notation of the reach title is omitted, and the display position of the premier character is different from that at the time of the reach establishment fanning production, but the display position of the premier character is the reach. It may be the same as at the time of the establishment fanning production.

At the end of the battle reach, an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 26 (see FIG. 28 (F)). When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, a victory suggestion effect suggesting that the character has defeated the enemy character and won is performed (see FIG. 28 (G)). In this victory suggestion effect, the characters "Destroy !!" indicating that the character has defeated the enemy character are displayed and the sound is output, and the effect 7 operates while emitting light in rainbow colors. At that time, the three small symbols displayed in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating doublet (see FIG. 28 (G)). If the player does not perform an operation within the valid period, the victory suggestion effect is automatically executed at the timing when the valid period ends, but the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "8R normal". In the case of ", the defeat suggestion effect is performed according to the operation or automatically.

When the victory suggestion effect is performed as described above, the three decorative symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed large in a pseudo-stopped state in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 28 (H)). ), With the main stop of the second special symbol, these three decorative symbols are finally stopped (see FIG. 28 (I)).

As described above, it is possible to execute the premier character effect a plurality of times during the variable display of the second special symbol not only in the normal gaming state but also in the probabilistic gaming state. Here, the case where the premier character production is performed three times within the same fluctuation of the second special symbol has been described as an example, but the premier character production may be performed twice within the same fluctuation, and the same. In some cases, the premier character production is performed only once within the fluctuation.

[Characteristics of each jackpot notice]
Hereinafter, the features of each jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. 21. During the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed, a hitting effect, a successful capture effect, a premier character effect, a rainbow-colored title display, and a rainbow Color cut-in and iridescent character display can be performed.

<Characteristics of bumping effect in normal game state>
The bumping effect in the normal game state is an effect in which the symbols are suddenly aligned without going through the reach (see FIG. 14). This bump effect is executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern A having a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It is a big hit notice (see FIG. 17 (A)). Since the effect pattern in which the bump effect is not performed is not prepared for the variation pattern A, the probability that the impact effect is executed when the variation pattern A is selected is 100 in the present embodiment. % (See FIG. 21). Note that, unlike the premier character production, this bumping effect has only one execution timing, and has a feature that it appears only immediately after the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal game state.

Further, although the variation pattern A selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" is associated with the abduction effect in the table stored in the sub ROM 132, it is usually Among the fluctuation patterns defined in the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table, there is no one associated with the hitting effect (see FIG. 17 (B)). Therefore, when the hit notification effect is performed after the hit effect, the game is always controlled in the probabilistic game state after the big hit game is completed. That is, when the hitting effect is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect called "next notice" may be performed during normal reach (see FIG. 7 (K)), but this "next notice" suggests execution of SPSP reach. It is a production to do. On the other hand, the bumping effect is an effect in which the patterns are suddenly aligned without going through the reach. Therefore, if the "next notice" is given during the variable display of the first special symbol, the abrupt effect is not executed. This also applies to the case where an effect or the like suggesting the establishment of reach is performed. Also, since the "next notice" is not performed if it does not develop to SPSP reach, it is not always executed during normal reach, but there is a production route that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach. , Once the reach is established, the hitting effect will not be executed after that, so when the "next notice" is executed, the hitting effect will not be executed, compared to the hitting effect. Therefore, it can be said that other reliability suggestion effects (for example, title display) are always executed, and other jackpot notices (for example, rainbow-colored title display) are likely to be executed.

Further, when the variation pattern A is selected, the validity period is not set, and when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the variation pattern A, it is irrelevant to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. The production is performed at the end. Therefore, since the hitting effect is executed at an unexpected timing by the player, it can be said that the hitting effect is a big hit notice that can obtain an extremely high effect.

<Characteristics of successful capture in normal game state>
The capture success effect is a jackpot notice executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" or "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern C is selected (FIG. 17 (A) and FIG. 17A). (B)). In addition, since the variation effect pattern in which the capture success effect is not performed is not prepared for the variation pattern C, the probability that the capture success effect is executed when the variation pattern C is selected is determined in the present embodiment. It is 100% (see FIG. 21). In addition, since this successful capture production is a dedicated production for the character SP reach, it has a feature that it can be executed only during the character SP reach. Further, the successful capture effect is characterized in that the jackpot notification is performed immediately after the successful capture effect is executed (see FIGS. 13A, 13H, and 13I). In other words, when the capture success effect is performed, the jackpot notification is performed at the character SPSP reach without the reach effect developing from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach (see FIG. 7).

The successful capture production is a dedicated production for the fluctuation pattern C. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern A is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the first special symbol is variablely displayed in this fluctuation pattern A, the successful capture effect is performed together with the abrupt effect. No. This also applies to other jackpot notices that are not associated with the fluctuation pattern A.

Further, the fluctuation pattern C can be selected in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the case where the determination result is "normal jackpot" (see FIGS. 17A and 17B). .. For this reason, if the hit notification effect is executed immediately after the successful capture effect and the jackpot game is performed, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state and the game is controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game is completed. There is.

Further, since the character SP reach is a reach effect that is not executed in the probabilistic game state, the capture success effect is also not executed in the probabilistic game state.

<Characteristics of premier character production in normal game state>
In this embodiment, the premier character production may appear in all reach productions such as normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern A is selected, the jackpot notice other than the hitting effect is not executed. Therefore, the premier character effect is the variation pattern of the first special symbol for the jackpot. It can be said that this is a jackpot notice that can be executed when a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern A is selected.

The execution probability of the premier character production differs depending on which fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol for the jackpot, but in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the premier character production is 5. It is set to a value within the range of ~ 40% (see FIG. 29). Therefore, it can be said that this is a jackpot notice with a lower execution probability than the hit effect that is executed when the variation pattern A is selected and the capture success effect that is executed when the variation pattern C is selected.

As described above based on FIG. 22, the premier character production may appear a plurality of times within the same fluctuation, and in the present embodiment, the premier character production is 1 within the same fluctuation of the first special symbol. It may be performed twice, twice, or three times.

Further, the fluctuation patterns B to E capable of executing the premier character effect can be selected in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the case where the determination result is "normal jackpot" (FIG. 17). (A) and (B)). For this reason, if the hit notification effect is executed after the premier character effect is performed and the jackpot game is performed, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state and in the normal game state after the jackpot game is completed. It may be done.

<Characteristics of rainbow-colored title display in normal game state>
The rainbow-colored title display is a jackpot notice that displays the reach titles related to the character SP reach and SPSP reach in rainbow colors, and the fluctuation patterns C to E to which the fluctuation patterns in which the character SP reach and SPSP reach are performed are associated. It is feasible if either is selected.

As is clear from the above, the rainbow-colored title display has a predetermined execution timing and may appear at the start of the character SP reach or at the start of the SPSP reach. When the reach effect develops into SPSP reach, the rainbow-colored title may be displayed at both the start of the character SP reach and the start of the SPSP reach.

The execution probability of the rainbow-colored title display differs depending on which of the fluctuation patterns C to E is selected, but in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the rainbow-colored title display is 5 to 15%. It is set to a value that falls within the range. The specific execution probabilities of the above-mentioned premier character production, rainbow-colored title display, rainbow-colored cut-in, and rainbow-colored character display will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29.

Further, the fluctuation patterns C to E in which the rainbow-colored title display can be executed can be selected in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the case where the determination result is "normal jackpot" (Fig.). 17 (A) and (B)). For this reason, when the hit notification effect is executed after the rainbow-colored title is displayed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state and the game is played in the normal game state. It may be controlled.

<Characteristics of rainbow-colored cut-in in normal game state>
The rainbow-colored cut-in is a jackpot notice that may appear at the end of the SPSP reach production. Therefore, the rainbow-colored title display can be executed when the variation patterns D and E associated with the variation effect pattern for performing the SPSP reach effect are selected as the variation effect pattern, and the execution probability is any variation. Even if the pattern is selected, it is set to be 5%.

Further, as described above, the rainbow-colored cut-in does not appear unless a predetermined operation (in the present embodiment, the operation of the up key or the down key of the effect key 27) is performed. Further, the rainbow-colored cut-in has a feature that it appears only when the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination is "16R probability variation". These things are as described above based on FIG.

<Characteristics of rainbow-colored character display in normal game state>
The rainbow-colored character display is a dedicated effect of these two types of reach effects performed during the character SP reach and the SPSP reach, and the variation patterns C to which the variation effect patterns in which these reach effects are performed are associated with each other. This is feasible when any of E (see FIGS. 17A and 17B) is selected. Although the execution probability of the rainbow-colored character display differs depending on the selected fluctuation pattern, it is set to a value within the range of 5 to 20% in the present embodiment.

The rainbow-colored character display may be performed during the character SP reach or during the SPSP reach. For example, a variation pattern associated with a variation effect pattern that develops from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach. If is selected, it may appear multiple times (eg, twice) within the same variation.

Further, the fluctuation patterns C to E in which the rainbow-colored character display can be executed can be selected in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the case where the determination result is "normal jackpot" (Fig.). 17 (A) and (B)). For this reason, when the hit notification effect is executed after the rainbow-colored characters are displayed and the jackpot game is performed, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state and the game is played in the normal game state. It may be controlled.

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state, as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed, a hitting effect, a one-shot announcement, a premier character effect, and 7 symbol reach are provided. It is feasible.

<Characteristics of bumping effect in probabilistic game state>
The bumping effect in the probabilistic game state is an effect in which the symbols are suddenly aligned without going through the reach (see FIG. 16). This bump effect is executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern L having a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a big hit notice (see FIG. 18 (A)). Since the effect pattern in which the bump effect is not performed is not prepared for the variation pattern L, the probability that the impact effect is executed when the variation pattern L is selected is 100 in the present embodiment. % (See FIG. 21). In addition, unlike the premier character production in the probabilistic game state, this abrupt effect has only one execution timing, and appears only immediately after the start of the change of the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state. There is a feature.

Further, although the variation pattern L selected when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" is associated with the bump effect, it is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal jackpot. None of the fluctuation patterns associated with the bump effect (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, when the hit notification effect is performed after the hit effect, the game is always controlled in the probabilistic game state after the big hit game is completed. That is, when the hitting effect is performed, the game is not controlled in the normal game state after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the variation pattern L is selected, the hitting effect is always executed. For example, in the probabilistic game state, the second special symbol (or the first) performed after the big hit game is completed. The hitting effect can be executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 30 times), and after reaching the predetermined value, the hitting effect is executed. You may not do it. This control can be realized, for example, by preventing the fluctuation pattern L from being selected after the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value.

<Characteristics of one-shot notification in probabilistic game state>
One announcement is a big hit notice that outputs a special effect sound from the speaker 24 with the rainbow-colored light emission of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37. This one notification is a jackpot notice that can be executed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "16R probability variation" and the variation pattern M or the variation pattern N is selected. Even when the fluctuation pattern of is selected, it is set to be 15%. If the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not "16R probability change", one notification is not made. Therefore, when one notification is made, "16R probability change" becomes rich at that time. As described above, since the one-shot notification performed in the probabilistic game state is a dedicated effect of "16R probable change", in the present embodiment, the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "8R probable change", or In the case of "4R probability change" and in the case of "8R normal", one notification is not made.

<Characteristics of 7 symbol reach in probabilistic game state>
The 7 symbol reach functioning as a jackpot notice is a dedicated effect of the probability variation game state that can be executed when any variation pattern of the variation patterns L to N is selected. That is, the 7 symbol reach in the normal game state does not have a function as a jackpot notice because the jackpot reliability is less than 100%. Since this 7 symbol reach is selected only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "16R probability variation", "16R probability variation" becomes rich when the reach is established with the 7 symbols.

[About the jackpot notice type selection table]
FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table. The sub ROM 132 is provided with a jackpot notice other than the jackpot notice associated with variable patterns such as a hit effect in the normal game state, a successful capture effect in the normal game state, a hit effect in the probability variation game state, and 7 symbol reach in the probability variation game state. The jackpot notice type selection table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute is stored.

The jackpot notice type selection table includes a first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (A)), a second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), and a third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29). (See (C)) and the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)).

(1st jackpot notice type selection table)
In the first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (A)), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern B is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. , Referenced when deciding whether or not to carry out the jackpot notice.

When the fluctuation pattern B is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number corresponding to the jackpot advance notice random number. By reading the notice type from the first jackpot notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot notice. In this embodiment, the range in which the jackpot notice random number can be taken is set to "0" to "99".

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, the jackpot notice that can be executed when the variation pattern B is selected is only the premier character production. For this reason, in the first jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (A)), "premier character production" and "no premier character production" are defined as jackpot notice types, and "premier character production is available". 40 random values are assigned to, and 60 random values are assigned to "no premier character production".

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern B is selected, the probability that "premier character effect is present" is read and the premier character effect is executed is determined. It is 40% (= 40/100).

(2nd jackpot notice type selection table)
In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. , Referenced when deciding whether or not to carry out the jackpot notice.

When the fluctuation pattern C is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number corresponding to the jackpot advance notice random number. By reading the notice type from the second big hit notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the big hit notice.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, when the variation pattern C is selected, there are three types of jackpot notices that can be executed other than the successful capture effect: the premier character effect, the rainbow-colored title display, and the rainbow-colored character display. be. Therefore, in the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), "with premier character production", "without premier character production", "with rainbow color title display", "without rainbow color title display", "With rainbow-colored characters displayed" and "without rainbow-colored characters" are stipulated.

In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), 10 random values are assigned to "with premier character production", and 90 random values are assigned to "without premier character production". Numerical values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "premier character effect is present" is read and the premier character effect is executed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern C is 10% (= 10/100).

Further, in the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), 15 random values are assigned to "with rainbow color title display", and for "without rainbow color title display". Eighty-five random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow-colored title display" is read and the rainbow-colored title is displayed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern C is 15% (= 15/100).

Further, in the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), 20 random values are assigned to "with rainbow-colored characters displayed", and for "without rainbow-colored characters displayed". Eighty random numbers are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow-colored character display" is read and the rainbow-colored character display is executed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern C is 20% (= 20/100).

In the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), a common random number value is assigned to "with premier character production" and "with rainbow-colored title display". Therefore, when the acquired jackpot notice random number is, for example, "64", both the premier character effect and the rainbow-colored title display are performed when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern C. It will be. This also applies to the premier character production and the rainbow-colored character display, and also the rainbow-colored title display and the rainbow-colored character display.

(3rd jackpot notice type selection table)
In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. If is selected, it will be referred to when deciding whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

When the fluctuation pattern D (or fluctuation pattern E) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice, and the jackpot notice random number is acquired. By reading the jackpot advance notice type corresponding to the advance notice random number from the third jackpot advance notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, the jackpot notice that can be executed when the fluctuation pattern D or the fluctuation pattern E is selected is the premier character production, the rainbow color title display, the rainbow color cut-in, and the rainbow color character display. There are four types. Therefore, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), "premier character production", "premier character production", "rainbow color title display", "rainbow color title display", "With rainbow color cut-in", "without rainbow color cut-in", "with rainbow color character display", and "without rainbow color character display" are specified.

In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see Fig. 29 (C)), 5 random values are assigned to "with premier character production", and 95 random values are assigned to "without premier character production". Numerical values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "premier character effect is present" is read and the premier character effect is executed due to the variation of the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E) is 5% (= 5/100).

Further, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), five random values are assigned to "with rainbow color title display", and for "without rainbow color title display". 95 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow-colored title display" is read and the rainbow-colored title is displayed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern D (or fluctuation pattern E) is 5% (= 5/100).

Further, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), five random values are assigned to "with rainbow color cut-in", and for "without rainbow color cut-in". 95 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow color cut-in" is read and the rainbow color cut-in is executed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern D (or fluctuation pattern E) is 5% (= 5/100).
However, since the rainbow color cut-in is not executed unless the jackpot related to the first special symbol judgment is "16R probability change", even if it is decided to execute the rainbow color cut-in, if it is not "16R probability change", the above No iridescent cut-in is performed when the key or down key is operated.

Further, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), five random values are assigned to "with rainbow-colored characters displayed", and for "without rainbow-colored characters displayed". 95 random values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "with rainbow-colored character display" is read and the rainbow-colored character display is executed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern D (or fluctuation pattern E) is 20% (= 20/100).

In the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), the execution probabilities of the premier character production, the rainbow color title display, the rainbow color cut-in, and the rainbow color character display are all 5%. However, these execution probabilities may be different from each other, or only one or two of them may be different from each other.

Further, in the third jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (C)), similarly to the second jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (B)), a disorder that is partially common to a plurality of jackpot notices. Numerical values are assigned. Therefore, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern D (or variable pattern E), a plurality of jackpot notices may be combined.

(4th jackpot notice type selection table)
In the fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)), the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot", and the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. ) Is selected, it is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute the jackpot notice.

When the fluctuation pattern M (or fluctuation pattern N) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice, and obtains the jackpot advance notice random number. By reading the jackpot advance notice type corresponding to the advance notice random number from the fourth jackpot advance notice type selection table, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 21, when the fluctuation pattern M or the fluctuation pattern N is selected, there are two types of jackpot notices that can be executed other than the 7 symbol reach: one notification and the premier character production. For this reason, in the 4th jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)), "one notification", "no one notification", "premier character production", and "no premier character production" are stipulated. Has been done.

In the 4th jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)), 15 random values are assigned to "with one notification", and 85 random values are assigned to "without one notification". Numerical values are assigned. Therefore, the probability that "one notification is present" is read and one notification is executed due to the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern M (or fluctuation pattern N) is 15% (= 15/100).

In addition, since one notification is a dedicated production of "16R probability change", even if the jackpot related to the second special symbol judgment is "probability change jackpot", it is the case of "8R probability change" or "4R probability change". Does not execute the one-shot notification even if "one-shot notification" is read.

Further, in the 4th jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)), 15 random values are assigned to "with premier character production" and 85 for "without premier character production". Random value is assigned. Therefore, the probability that "premier character effect is present" is read and the premier character effect is executed due to the variation of the variation pattern M (or variation pattern N) is 15% (= 15/100).

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state is "8R normal", the probabilistic game state ends and the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. Therefore, the "8R normal" related to the second special symbol determination is not a very preferable jackpot for the player, and if the jackpot notice is given to such a jackpot, the player feels uncomfortable. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the effect of the production will be reduced.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot notice type selection table to be referred to when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "8R normal" is not prepared.

[About the execution timing of each effect in the normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the execution timing of each effect in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 30 is a time chart showing a specific example of the effect in the normal gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 30 (A), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern A is selected, it is approximately after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. By the time 2 seconds have passed, the liquid crystal screen 5 undergoes high-speed fluctuations in which the three rows of symbols are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed, and along with this, a darkening effect (see FIG. 14 (C)) is performed. Will be done. Then, following this darkening effect, the above-mentioned bump effect is executed over about 3 seconds, and as the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stops as the first special symbol, a hit notification effect for notifying the probability variation jackpot is performed. Be told.

In this way, when the fluctuation pattern A (see FIG. 17 (A)) having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected, the effect of notifying the establishment of reach, which can be executed when another fluctuation pattern is selected, is produced. , Normal reach, character SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. are not executed.

Further, the bumping effect in the normal gaming state is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern A. Therefore, when another fluctuation pattern such as the fluctuation pattern C is selected, the bumping effect is not executed. On the contrary, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the fluctuation pattern A, the jackpot notice executed when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in another fluctuation pattern is not executed. ..

As illustrated in FIG. 30B, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern C having a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol The pre-reach production is performed from the start of the game until the reach is established. This pre-reach effect consists of high-speed fluctuations that scroll the three rows of symbols from top to bottom at high speed, and low-speed fluctuations that gradually reduce the scroll speed of each symbol row to pseudo-stop the left and right symbols. The high-speed variation, which is the effect of the first half of the pre-reach effect, is common to the high-speed variation performed when the variation pattern A is selected.

As is clear from this, when the fluctuation pattern A is selected, a sudden collision effect occurs while the high-speed fluctuation of the symbol sequence, which is common to the case where other fluctuation patterns are selected, is being performed. do. For this reason, it is possible to obtain a high effect by giving a big surprise to the player who predicted that the scroll speed will be reduced and the effect of reaching will be established.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30 (B), the pre-reach production is performed as described above, the reach is established, the normal reach develops into the character SP reach, and the capture success production follows the competition production during the character SP reach. Is performed, and immediately after that, a hit notification effect is performed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. Here, the successful capture effect is an effect that functions as a jackpot notice as described above, but the abrupt effect is 5 seconds, which is the variation time of the variation pattern A after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. It is different from the bumping effect in that it is performed after a very long time of 31 seconds, which is 5 seconds or more, while it is performed before the lapse of.

By the way, if the hitting effect is not performed even after 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L, has passed since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol was started, the player expects the appearance of the jackpot notice. It may gradually decrease. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern L is selected, 5 seconds or more have elapsed since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol was started, and 40 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern M, has elapsed. By performing the premier character production as a big hit notice, the player can be surprised and a high production effect can be obtained.

Further, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the variation pattern H (see FIG. 17 (C)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the character SP This is different from the case where the variation pattern C is selected in that the common effects of the reach title display and the competition effect are executed, and the capture failure effect is performed instead of the capture success effect. That is, when the case where the variation pattern C is selected and the case where the variation pattern H is selected are compared, a common effect common to each other is executed, but when the variation pattern C is selected, the common effect is combined with the common effect. While both the jackpot notice (here, the successful capture effect) is performed, when the fluctuation pattern H is selected, the common effect is executed without executing the jackpot notice, which is different between the two. do.

Further, the abutting effect in the normal game state is an effect configured to end within 5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern C in which the fluctuation time is 40 seconds is selected, even if it is a probabilistic jackpot, the hitting effect is not performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 30C, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination becomes "big hit" and the variation pattern E is selected, the first special symbol is variedly displayed in the variation pattern E. Along with this, pre-reach production (composed of high-speed fluctuation and low-speed fluctuation), normal reach, character SP reach, and SPSP reach are performed. Here, as compared with the effect executed when the variation pattern C is selected, it is common in that the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, the title display, and the scramble effect are executed. On the other hand, an effect that is not executed in the fluctuation pattern C such as a competition failure effect or SPSP reach is executed.

Further, FIG. 30C shows that the rainbow-colored cut-in is executed in response to the operation for the operation promotion effect at the final stage of the SPSP reach, but when the variation pattern A is selected, the third 1 The time (2 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the special symbol to the execution of the jackpot notice (sudden effect), and when the variation pattern C is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The time (31 seconds) from the time until the jackpot notice (successful capture effect) is executed, and the jackpot notice (rainbow color cut-in) after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started when the fluctuation pattern E is selected. ) Is executed (79 seconds (= 40 seconds + 39 seconds)) and is different from each other. Further, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern E, the bumping effect or the successful capture effect is not performed.

Further, as is clear from the comparison between the notation of FIG. 30 (A) and the notation of FIG. 30 (B), from the execution of the hit effect according to the selection of the variation pattern A to the execution of the hit notification effect. The time (third time) is 3 seconds, whereas the time (fourth hour) from the execution of the successful capture effect to the execution of the hit notification effect according to the selection of the fluctuation pattern C is 9 It is seconds, and the third time and the fourth time are different from each other. Here, since the third hour is shorter than the fourth hour, it can be said that the abrupt production has a higher effect of making the player feel that the sudden big hit has occurred than the successful capture effect.

In the present embodiment, the case where the above-mentioned third time is shorter than the fourth time will be described, but in other embodiments, the third time may be longer than the fourth time.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern A is selected, the collision effect is executed at the first execution timing immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. On the other hand, the premier character production that can be executed when a fluctuation pattern other than the fluctuation pattern A is selected is executed during the competition production of the character SP reach (see FIG. 22 (A): an example of the second timing). It differs from the abrupt effect in that there are times when it is executed during SPSP reach (see FIG. 22 (B): an example of the third timing).

Since the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a hitting effect in which the execution timing and the number of executions are fixed and a premier character effect in which the number of executions and the execution timing are variable, the jackpot notice becomes monotonous. Can be suppressed and a high effect can be obtained.

[About the execution timing of each effect in the probabilistic game state]
Next, the execution timing of each effect in the probabilistic game state will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Here, FIG. 31 is a time chart showing a specific example of the effect in the probabilistic gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 31 (A), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern L is selected, it is approximately after the variation display of the second special symbol is started. By the time one second elapses, the liquid crystal screen 5 undergoes high-speed fluctuations in which three rows of symbols are scrolled from top to bottom at high speed, and along with this, a darkening effect (see FIG. 16C) is performed. Will be done. Then, following this darkening effect, the above-mentioned abutting effect is executed over about 4 seconds, and as any of the big hit symbols Y1 to Y3 stops as the second special symbol, the hit notification for notifying the probability change big hit is given. The production is performed.

In this way, when the fluctuation pattern L (see FIG. 18A) having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected, the effect of notifying the establishment of reach, which can be executed when another fluctuation pattern is selected, is produced. , Battle reach, etc. are not executed.

Further, the bumping effect in the probabilistic game state is a dedicated effect for the variation pattern L. Therefore, when another fluctuation pattern such as the fluctuation pattern M is selected, the bumping effect is not executed. On the contrary, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the fluctuation pattern L, the jackpot notice executed when the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the other fluctuation pattern is not executed. ..

When the variation pattern L is selected, the collision effect may be started almost at the same time as the start of the high-speed variation of the decorative symbol without executing the darkening effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the fluctuation pattern A selected in the normal gaming state and the fluctuation pattern L selected in the probabilistic gaming state have a common fluctuation time will be described. In embodiments, these variation times may be different. That is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern A may be shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L, or the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern A may be longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L.

As illustrated in FIG. 31 (B), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern M having a variation time of 40 seconds is selected, the variation of the second special symbol From the start of the display until the reach is established, the pre-reach effect is performed. This pre-reach effect consists of high-speed fluctuations that scroll the three rows of symbols from top to bottom at high speed, and low-speed fluctuations that gradually reduce the scroll speed of each symbol row to pseudo-stop the left and right symbols. The high-speed variation, which is the effect of the first half of the pre-reach effect, is common to the high-speed variation performed when the variation pattern L is selected.

As is clear from this, when the fluctuation pattern L is selected, a sudden collision effect occurs while the high-speed fluctuation of the symbol sequence, which is common to the case where other fluctuation patterns are selected, is being performed. do. For this reason, it is possible to obtain a high effect by giving a big surprise to the player who predicted that the scroll speed will be reduced and the effect of reaching will be established.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 31 (B), the pre-reach effect is performed as described above, the reach is established, the battle reach is started, the operation promotion effect is performed at the end of the battle reach, and the effect button 26 The victory suggestion effect is executed according to the operation of (see FIG. 15). Here, as illustrated in FIG. 31 (B), when the operation promotion effect is performed, the premier character effect as a jackpot notice may be performed, but the abrupt effect performed for the variation pattern L may be performed. , 30 seconds (= 10 seconds + 30 seconds) of 5 seconds or more, whereas it is performed before 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern L, elapses after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. It differs from the end-of-life production in that it is performed after a very long time has passed.

Further, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern N (see FIG. 18 (A)) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the pre-reach effect is changed to the battle reach. After the operation promotion effect is performed during this battle reach, the defeat suggestion effect is performed, and after pretending to be a loss, the revival effect is performed and the victory suggestion effect is performed. When the effect performed on the variation pattern N is compared with the effect performed on the variation pattern L, it is common in that high-speed variation of the three symbol sequences is performed. On the other hand, in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern N, the two are different in that the battle reach, the operation promotion effect, the defeat suggestion effect, the resurrection effect, the victory suggestion effect, etc., which are not performed for the fluctuation pattern L, are performed. There is.

Further, the collision effect in the probabilistic game state is an effect configured to end within 5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern N having a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is selected, the hitting effect is not performed although it is a probability variation jackpot.

Further, FIG. 31 (C) shows that one notification is made immediately after the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, but when the variation pattern L is selected, the variation of the second special symbol is performed. The time (1 second) from the start of the display until the jackpot notice (sudden hit effect) is executed, and the jackpot notice (1 second) after the variable display of the second special symbol is started when the fluctuation pattern M is selected. The time (30 seconds) until the premier character production) is executed, and from the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol when the fluctuation pattern N is selected until the jackpot notice (one notification) is executed. Time (here, about 0 seconds) is different from each other. Further, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern N, the bumping effect is not performed.

[About the reliability of pre-production]
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the hold icon. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pre-production may be performed as an effect of displaying a special icon as a hold icon to suggest a jackpot reliability. In the gaming machine 1, when the first special symbol determination is suspended, a pre-determination process of whether or not to execute the jackpot game may be executed. Specifically, if the first special symbol determination is performed based on the jackpot random number acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11, will it be determined as a "big hit"? Whether or not it is determined in advance. In addition, which fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed according to the execution of the first special symbol determination based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the above jackpot random number, etc. Is also determined in advance. Then, based on these pre-judgment results, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-effect, and when the pre-effect is executed, which color the display color of the hold icon should be, etc., and these determination results are used. Preliminary production is performed accordingly.

As illustrated in FIG. 32, the effect of displaying the normal icon as the hold icon without performing the pre-effect is an effect suggesting that the jackpot reliability is 1%. On the other hand, when executing the pre-effect, the hold icon may be displayed in blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow color, but the jackpot reliability of the pre-effect that displays the blue hold icon is about 5%. Is. Further, the jackpot reliability of the pre-effect that displays the green hold icon is about 10%, and the jackpot reliability of the pre-effect that displays the red hold icon is about 50%. Further, the jackpot reliability of the pre-effect that displays the golden hold icon is about 75%, and the jackpot reliability of the pre-effect that displays the rainbow-colored hold icon is 100%.

From these facts, it can be said that the pre-effect of displaying the rainbow-colored hold icon has a function as a jackpot notice for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed. That is, the pre-production does not function as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed when the hold icon is displayed in a display color other than the rainbow color, but the hold icon is a rainbow. When displayed in color, the pre-production functions as a jackpot notice.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is executed, a preliminary determination result indicating that at least the variation pattern of the first special symbol to which the normal reach effect is to be performed is selected is obtained. If it is not obtained, the pre-effect of displaying the blue hold icon is not executed. That is, when a pre-determination result indicating that the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the non-reach effect is selected, the pre-effect that displays the blue hold icon is not performed.

The same applies to the pre-production that displays green hold, red hold, gold hold, and rainbow hold, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in which at least one of the character SP reach and the SPSP reach is executed is If a pre-judgment result indicating that the character is selected is not obtained, a configuration is adopted in which the pre-effect of displaying a green or higher hold icon is not performed.

The jackpot notice given in the normal game state can be executed when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", but can be executed when the judgment result is "missing". No. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot notice is more likely to be executed (may be always executed) when the pre-effect is performed, as compared with the case where the pre-effect for displaying the hold icon in a color equal to or higher than blue is not performed. Therefore, by executing the pre-effect, the player is notified of the appearance of the jackpot notice in the fluctuation (variation display of the first special symbol performed in response to the execution of the reserved first special symbol determination). It can be expected effectively. In addition, when the pre-production is performed, it is easy for other reliability suggestion effects to be executed in a production mode with high reliability (expectation of big hit and expectation of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state when the jackpot is a big hit) (always reliability). It may be executed in a high production mode.).

By the way, the abrupt effect performed in the normal gaming state is not executed unless the variation pattern A in which the variation time in which the reach effect is not executed is 5 seconds is selected. Therefore, at least when the pre-effect that is executed only when the normal reach effect is to be performed is performed, the sudden effect is not executed due to the fluctuation. Therefore, it can be said that the pre-production is a production that denies the appearance of the sudden production.

That is, when the pre-effect that displays the hold icon of blue or more is executed, the probability that the other jackpot notice is executed is higher than the probability that the hit effect is executed (0% in this embodiment). It can be said that.

If the white hold icon is displayed without any pre-effect, basically, the player can hardly expect a big hit. However, in the present embodiment, while there is a possibility that the bump effect is executed when the pre-effect is not performed, there is no possibility that the bump effect is executed when the pre-effect is performed. You can expect the appearance of the big hit notice. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to appear the jackpot notice in both the case where the pre-effect is not executed and the case where the pre-effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the pre-effect based on the pre-determination result is an icon change effect for displaying the hold icon in a display mode different from the usual one is described, but the pre-effect is based on the pre-determination result. If it is a production based on it, it may be another production. For example, the pre-effect may be a chance eye effect in which a specific combination of decorative symbols called a so-called chance eye is stopped and displayed at the time of the loss notification effect before the fluctuation is started. Further, the pre-effect may be a mode transition effect that changes the effect mode from a normal effect mode to a specific effect mode (such as called a zone) based on the pre-determination result.

[About various screens displayed when waiting for customers]
FIG. 33 is a screen view illustrating the customer waiting menu screen. When the variable display of the symbol is not performed in the state where the right to determine the special symbol is not reserved, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the so-called customer waiting state. Then, when the set time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the transition to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 33 (A)). As illustrated in FIG. 33A, the customer waiting menu screen has an image suggesting that the occurrence rate of the jackpot notice can be selected by operating (pressing) the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 in the present embodiment. Includes an image suggesting that the volume can be set by operating (pressing) the left key or the right key of the effect key 27, and an image suggesting that the light intensity can be set by operating (pressing) the up key or the down key of the effect key 27. It is configured as follows.

When the player operates the left key or the right key of the effect key 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, the volume setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33 (B) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33 (B), the volume setting screen has an image showing the current volume, an image showing that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left key or the right key of the effect key 27, and the effect button 26. It is configured to have an image indicating that the display of the volume setting screen ends when the operation is performed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the left key of the effect key 27 while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume can be lowered, and conversely, the volume can be raised by operating the right key. .. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can switch the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24 in five stages, and in FIG. 33 (B), the volume is the third stage out of the five stages. The state set to is shown.

On the other hand, when the player operates the up key or the down key of the effect key 27 while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed, the light amount setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33 (D) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33 (D), the light amount setting screen has an image showing the current light amount, an image showing that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the up key or the down key of the effect key 27, and the effect button 26. It is configured to have an image indicating that the display of the light amount setting screen ends when the operation is performed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the upper key of the effect key 27 while the light amount setting screen is displayed, the light amount can be increased, and conversely, the volume can be decreased by operating the lower key. .. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can switch the amount of light of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in three stages, and in FIG. 33 (D), the amount of light is one of the three stages. The state set for the eyes (minimum) is shown.

When the player operates the effect button 26 while the customer waiting menu screen (see FIG. 33 (A)) is displayed, the jackpot notice occurrence rate setting screen illustrated in FIG. 33 (C) is displayed. As illustrated in FIG. 33 (C), the jackpot notice occurrence rate setting screen has two selection items (“normal” and “significantly UP”) regarding the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, and the left key or right of the effect key 27. It is composed of an image showing that the cursor can be moved to two selection items by operating the key and an image showing that the selection regarding the occurrence rate of the jackpot notice can be determined by operating the effect button 26.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set either a "normal mode" in which the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is relatively low or a "big hit notice up mode" in which the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is relatively high.
FIG. 33 (C) illustrates a state in which the cursor is located at "normal" of the two selection items "significantly UP" and "normal", and "normal" is highlighted. .. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 in this state, it is determined that "normal" is selected, and the "normal mode" is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to the information indicating the "normal mode".
On the other hand, when the player operates the left key of the effect key 27 while the cursor is positioned in "normal" as illustrated in FIG. 33 (C), the cursor moves to "significantly UP" and ""SignificantlyUP" will be highlighted. Then, when the player operates the effect button 26 in this state, it is determined that "significantly UP" has been selected, and the "big hit notice up mode" is set. Specifically, the mode setting information stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to the information indicating the "big hit notice up mode".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player arbitrarily changes the appearance rate of the jackpot notice, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 24, and the amount of light of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It is possible.

[About the appearance rate of jackpot notice]
Next, the appearance rate of the jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot notice type selection table used when the jackpot notice up mode is set.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to the "normal mode" or the "big hit notice up mode" with respect to the appearance rate of the jackpot notice. When the "normal mode" is set, it is determined whether or not to execute each jackpot notice with reference to the jackpot notice type selection table described above based on FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (D). On the other hand, when the "big hit notice up mode" is set, each jackpot notice is executed with reference to the jackpot notice type selection table for the big hit notice up mode illustrated in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D). Whether or not to do it is decided.

For the process of determining whether or not to execute each jackpot notice using each jackpot notice type selection table exemplified in FIG. 34, each jackpot notice is given with reference to FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (D). Since it is the same as the process of deciding whether or not to execute, detailed description here will be omitted.

When the jackpot notice type selection table illustrated in FIG. 29 is compared with the jackpot notice type selection table for the jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIG. 34, it corresponds to "Yes" of each notice effect. The number of random numbers attached is different. Specifically, in the jackpot notice type selection table for each jackpot notice up mode illustrated in FIG. 34, for the jackpot notice type selection table exemplified in FIG. 29, for each jackpot notice "yes". The number of associated random numbers is doubled. Therefore, by setting the "big hit notice up mode", the appearance rate of the big hit notice is about twice as much as when it is set to the "normal mode".

Further, here, an example in which the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is doubled has been described, but how much the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is increased can be changed as appropriate. For example, the appearance rate of the jackpot notice is increased by 10 times. You may prepare a table for the jackpot notice up mode. Further, here, the case where the appearance rate of each jackpot notice is uniformly doubled has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, for example, the appearance rate of the premier character production is increased by 5 times, while one. The rate at which the appearance rate increases may differ depending on the type of advance notice effect, such as increasing the appearance rate of notifications by 10 times.

By the way, as is clear from the above explanations based on FIGS. Whether or not to execute is determined without using the selection table. Then, the variation effect pattern table (corresponding the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation effect pattern) stored in the sub ROM 132, which is used to determine whether or not to execute these jackpot notices, is described as " Even if the jackpot notice up mode is set, it will not be possible to switch to another table. For this reason, even if the "big hit notice up mode" is set for the hitting effect and the successful capture effect performed in the normal game state, and the hitting effect performed in the probabilistic game state, other big hits The appearance rate does not change as in the previous notice.

[Configuration example of main RAM 103]
FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 35 (A), the main RAM 103 is determined as a storage area for storing the acquired information or the like acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. Use storage area 1030, 1st hold storage area 1031, 2nd hold storage area 1032, 3rd hold storage area 1033, 4th hold storage area 1034, 1st hold storage area 1035, 2nd hold storage area 1036, 3rd hold A storage area 1037 and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas for storing various information related to the first special symbol determination, and the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are the second. This is a storage area in which various information related to the special symbol determination is stored. Further, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested with respect to the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when the special symbol determination is executed, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the second special symbol determination is reserved, and the first When only the special symbol determination is reserved, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 35 (B), the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are an area for storing a jackpot random number, an area for storing a symbol random number, and an area for storing a reach random number, which are acquired by the main CPU 101, respectively. It includes an area for storing a variation pattern random number, an area for storing pre-judgment information which is information indicating a pre-judgment result, and the like. That is, the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are areas for storing information for retaining the right to determine the special symbol.

The jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 40) described later based on a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number. The pre-judgment information is, specifically, winning start information, information indicating whether or not the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, information indicating what kind of big hit is. It includes information indicating a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning start opening information is acquired when the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the same hold storage area are won by the game ball in the first starting opening 11. This is information indicating whether or not the game ball was acquired when the game ball won a prize in the second starting port 12. The pre-determination information including this information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

The five pieces of information described with reference to FIG. 35B are the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 each time a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11. It is stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1035 and 1038 in order from the first reserved storage area 1035 each time a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12.

For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where no information is stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, these five pieces of information are stored. It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. Further, for example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the first hold storage area 1031 and the second hold storage area 1032, these five pieces of information are obtained. Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

Further, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is executed, it is stored in the reserved storage area 1032 or later in the second reserved storage area 1032. The information is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 in a state where the information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the second The information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

Such information shift processing is also performed in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, that is, the information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. When stored, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is prioritized prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

By the way, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 and various random numbers are acquired when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or during the jackpot game, the special symbol judgment or the special symbol The fluctuation display cannot be performed immediately.

Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such a situation, the main CPU 101 uses the acquired various random numbers and the like as information for holding the right to determine the special symbol in the reserved storage area 1031. It is stored in any of the areas from 10 to 38. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not held, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 receives various random numbers and the like acquired when the start opening prize is won. It is stored directly in the determination storage area 1030.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can reserve the right of the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by the game control board 100]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed on the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 36 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. .. The processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 and 36 is performed according to the instructions issued by the main CPU 101 based on the program stored in the main ROM 102.

First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1).

The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are as described above, and the normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 12. The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are added by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as the counter that performs the process of step S1, and each random number is returned to "0" and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process including a process of acquiring various random numbers in response to the input of detection signals from each switch (step S2). This switch processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol determination to cause the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the above is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 41.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing the normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs an electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5).

Following the process of step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines in the process of step S3 that it is a big hit, the main CPU 101 controls the large prize opening control unit 117 to open the large winning opening 13. Execute (step S6).

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

Following the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 and the effect contents in the process steps prior to step S7. The process is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. 36. Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of input of a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 as illustrated in FIG. 37, and is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers), the first start port switch process including the process of acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input is executed. (Step S21). This first start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 38.

Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 112, and the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is transmitted to various random numbers appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The second start port switch process including the process of acquiring the value at the time of input is executed (step S22). This second start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 39.

Then, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the first gate switch 114 (or the second gate switch 115), and the first gate switch is used for the ordinary symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate switch process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from 114 (or the second gate switch 115) is input is executed (step S23).

[First start port switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 37. As illustrated in FIG. 38, in the main CPU 101, following the random number update process in step S1, the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (specifically, the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON”. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” based on whether or not an ON signal indicating that the above is input (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is "ON" (step S210: YES), the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is less than Umax1 (“4” in the present embodiment) (step S211).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S211: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S212), and the first special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

In this way, various acquisition information such as a jackpot random number is acquired according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” when the number of holds U1 is less than the maximum number of holds Umax1.
When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. When various random numbers are acquired in, these random numbers are stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

Following the process in step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S217). The time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 103. At this time, the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when the electric tulip 17 is controlled so that the game ball is difficult to win in the second starting port 12, and conversely, the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 12. This is a flag set to "ON" when the electric tulip 17 is controlled to the state. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the main CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process (step S218). Specifically, whether or not a jackpot is achieved based on the acquired information acquired by the processes of steps S213 to S216 prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 42) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 43), which will be described later. In addition to pre-determining, pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218, or determines that it is in a high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "ON") (step S217: YES), the first special symbol determination is performed. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S218, and the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. Will be sent to.

[Second start port switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 37. As illustrated in FIG. 39, in the main CPU 101, following the first start port switch process in step S21, the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (specifically, the second start port switch 112 is “ON”. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 112 is turned “ON” based on whether or not an ON signal indicating that the value has been changed to “ON” has been input (step S220).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is "ON" (step S220: YES), the hold number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is less than Umax2 (“4” in the present embodiment) (step S221).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S221: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S222), and the second special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S226).

When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in, these random numbers are stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1035 and the fourth reserved storage area 1038.

Following the process in step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, as in the process in step S217 (step S227). Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S227: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the pre-determination process is executed (step S228). This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S228, or determines that it is not in the high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "OFF") (step S227: NO), the second special symbol determination is performed. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S229). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S228, and the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. Will be sent to.

[Preliminary determination processing by the game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the pre-determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS. 38 and 39.

The main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process when it is determined in the process of step S217 of FIG. 38 that it is not in the high base state, or when it is determined in the process of step S227 of FIG. 39 that it is in the high base state (step S2181). ). Specifically, in the case of a low probability state (normal game state or time saving game state in this embodiment), the jackpot random number table for low probability (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103. Set to. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state (probability variation game state in the present embodiment), the jackpot random number table for high probability (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. Then, whether or not the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S213 of FIG. 38 (or the process of step S223 of FIG. 39) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 103. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result in step S2181 (step S2182). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: YES), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183). When executing the pre-determination process related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state, the tables illustrated in FIGS. 17A and 17B are set. Further, when executing the pre-determination process related to the second special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state, the tables illustrated in FIGS. 18A and 18B are set.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: NO), it determines whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation (step S2184). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2184: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2185). For example, when executing the preliminary determination related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state, the table illustrated in FIG. 17C is set.

By the way, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, the first special symbol is based on the number of pending first special symbol determinations at the start of the fluctuation. Fluctuation pattern is determined. Then, the number of pending first special symbol determinations may differ between before and after the reserved first special symbol determination is digested. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. be. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the variation, it may not be possible to acquire an accurate variation pattern of the special symbol prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the process proceeds to step S2187 without performing the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2186 described later.

When the main CPU 101 sets the jackpot variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern random number determination process (step S2186). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is among the random number values defined in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation is specified.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2186 or determines that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the main CPU 101 generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187). The area in which the pre-determination information is stored is as described above based on FIG. 35.

In this way, the main CPU 101 is based on the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 11 (or the second start port 12), and the jackpot based on this acquisition information. Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

Here, the pre-judgment process performed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved has been described as an example, but the same pre-judgment process is also performed when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved. Judgment processing is performed. Further, if the right of special symbol determination is not reserved and is immediately executed, the pre-determination process is not performed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 can execute a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game before the special symbol determination is performed on the reserved right.

[Special symbol processing by the game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 36.

As illustrated in FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U2 is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the hold number U2 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S305). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U1 is "1" or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value subtracted by "1" (step S306).

Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). When the main CPU 101 executes the shift process of step S308 following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 for the second special symbol determination. The storage area 1030 is shifted, and the remaining acquired information is shifted to the storage area 1030 for determination. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 for the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030. At the same time as shifting, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

Following the process in step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, the setting information of the special symbol indicating the result of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42.

As is clear from the notation of FIG. 41, when the starting condition that the main CPU 101 is not in the jackpot game and the symbol is not changing is satisfied, in step S309, based on the jackpot random number or the like acquired at the time of winning the starting opening, It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player.

Following the process in step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S310). This fluctuation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S309, the setting information of this special symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether or not the above is related, information on setting the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S310, information on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like is set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the variable display of the decorative design on the liquid crystal display device 5 and the like are started.

Following the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S311 (step S312). At that time, if the processes of steps S309 to S311 are performed with the acquired information (random numbers) related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 1030, the first special symbol display 41 Start the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the processes of steps S309 to S311 are performed with the acquired information (random numbers) related to the second special symbol determination stored, the second special symbol display 42 displays the variation of the second special symbol. To start.

Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

The main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of measurement of the fluctuation time in step S313 when the process of step S313 is executed or when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step S302: YES). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. A symbol confirmation command for notifying that is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process of stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in a manner showing the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) set in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been variable-displaying the special symbol. The stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner, and then displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the fluctuation time that started measurement in the process of step S313 (step S318), and performs a stopped process including a process of starting a jackpot game when a jackpot is hit. Execute (step S319). This stopped processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

[Big hit determination process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41. The main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random numbers stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S3091). Specifically, whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is a jackpot based on whether or not it matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A). judge.

The winning value here is a jackpot winning value defined in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high probability state (probability variation game state in the present embodiment), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for high probability is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state (normal gaming state or time-saving gaming state in the present embodiment), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability is used.

In this way, the main CPU 101 starts such that the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 is stored in the determination storage area 1030. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the type of jackpot is selected by referring to the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 6B and 6C) stored in the main ROM 102. Determine (step S3093).

Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3091 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , The type of jackpot is determined based on which random number value defined in the symbol determination table for winning the first starting opening (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, when it is related to the second special symbol determination, the symbol random number matches any random number value defined in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 6C) for winning the second starting opening. Determine the type of jackpot based on.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the jackpot symbol according to the determined jackpot type in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here during the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol is performed. Will be

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3092: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the lost symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3095). As a result, the lost symbol set here during the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

[Variation pattern selection process by game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. 41. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 41, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3091 is a jackpot (step S3101). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3101: YES), the jackpot variation pattern table (see FIGS. 17 and 18) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), whether or not the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a big hit (step S3103). Here, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3103: YES), the reach variation pattern table (see FIG. 17C) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). On the contrary, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3103: NO), the loss variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern random number determination process with reference to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S3102, the process of step S3104, or the process of step S3105 (step S3106). Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern table or the reach fluctuation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is set. The variation pattern is selected by reading from the pattern table.

Further, when the variable pattern table for loss is set in the main RAM 103, the number of reserved special symbol determinations is specified based on the number of reserved storage areas in which various information is stored immediately before the shift process of step S308 is performed. , The fluctuation pattern is selected by reading the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holds and the presence / absence of the current time reduction from the fluctuation pattern table for loss.

By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 101 selects a fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the selected fluctuation pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). The fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the effect control board 130 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process in step S309 described above.

[Processing during stop by the game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the stopped processing in step S319 of FIG. 41. After resetting the fluctuation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit, as in the process of step S3092 (see FIG. 42), as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step). S3191). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3191: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3192).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving game flag and the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S3193). Here, the time-saving game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time-saving state is provided with the electric chew support function, and the probability variation game flag has a relative probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the time-saving gaming flag and the probabilistic gaming flag. That is, both the probabilistic game flag and the time-saving game flag are set to "ON" when controlling the game state to the probabilistic game state, and the probabilistic game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the game state to the time-saving game state. When the game state is controlled to the normal game state, both the probability variation game flag and the time-saving game flag are set to "OFF".

Following the process of step S3193, the main CPU 101 sets an opening command in the main RAM 103 for notifying that the jackpot game is started (step S3194). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the jackpot 13 during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3191: NO), it determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3196). Here, when it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3196: YES), the time saving game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step). S3197). The time-saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3197, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game residual number J is "0" (step S3198). Here, when it is determined that the time-saving game residual number J is "0" (step S3198: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3199). As a result, the electric chew support function is not provided.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3199, determines that the time saving game flag is not "ON" (step S3196: NO), or determines that the time saving game residual number J is not "0" (step S3196: NO). Step S3198: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3201: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the high probability game residual number K stored in the main RAM 103 to a value subtracted by "1". (Step S3202). The high-probability game residual number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high-probability state.

Following the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual number K is “0” (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the high-probability game residual number K is "0" (step S3203: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3204). As a result, the special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

When the process of step S3204 is performed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not "ON" (step S3201: NO), when it is determined that the high probability game residual number K is not "0" (step S3201: NO). When the process of step S3203: NO) or step S3194 is performed, the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing of step S4.

[Game state setting process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the game state setting process executed at the end of the jackpot game on the game control board 100. In the gaming machine 1, the jackpot game is executed by the jackpot opening control process in step S6, but when the ending in this jackpot game is completed, the gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the jackpot game is completed. Is executed.

When the ending of the jackpot game is completed, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game this time is a probabilistic jackpot based on the setting information of the symbol stored in the main RAM 103 (step). S6261). Here, if it is determined that the hit is not a probability variation jackpot (step S6261: NO), the process proceeds to step S6266, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a probability variation jackpot (step S6261: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S6262), and the high probability game residual number K is set to, for example, "10000" (step). S6263). By performing the process of step S6263, the high probability state is substantially continued until the next big hit.

Following the process of step S6263, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving game flag to "ON" (step S6264), and sets the time saving game residual number J to "10000" (step S6265). By performing the series of processes of steps S6262 to S6265 in this way, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a probability variation jackpot (step S6261: NO), the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S6266), and the time saving game residual number J is set to "50" (step S6267). ..

By performing the series of processes of step S6266 and step S6267 in this way, the game can be played in a time-saving game state from the end of the big hit game until the special symbol determination is performed 50 times if no big hit occurs in the middle. It will be controlled.

[Timer interrupt processing by the effect control board 130]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing described later. Then, the sub CPU 131 repeats the random number update process for updating the effect random number or the like used for determining the effect content in a predetermined cycle shorter than the CTC cycle. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process in the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process in the predetermined cycle while the gaming machine 1 is running.

Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed on the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the effect control board 130. The sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 46 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed on the game control board 100. The processing performed by the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 46 and 46 is performed according to an instruction issued by the sub CPU 131 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132.

First, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process including a process of performing a process according to the command when a command is received from the game control board 100 (step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 47.

Following the process in step S10, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S30). Specifically, the command set in the sub RAM 133 by the process of step S10 is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). By executing this command transmission process, the image / sound control board 140 is instructed to execute the effect by displaying an image, sound output, etc., and the effect by lighting various lamps, etc. is executed on the lamp control board 150. Instructed.

Then, the sub CPU 131 executes the data transfer process (step S50). Specifically, since the data related to the image / sound control is transmitted from the image / sound control board 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the effect by the effect medium such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect accessory 7, and the effect button 26 is controlled by the lamp control board 150 so as to be synchronized with the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. Will be done.

[Command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 46. As illustrated in FIG. 47, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11: YES), the sub CPU 131 controls the game according to the processing of step S219 (see FIG. 38) or step S229 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether or not the command is a hold command transmitted from the board 100 (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S14, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the hold command reception process (step S13). This hold command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 48.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S311 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S18, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the variation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the variation start command reception process (step S15). This fluctuation start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 49.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S14: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S316 (see FIG. 41). (Step S18). When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is a symbol determination command (step S18: YES), the sub CPU 131 stops and displays the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation after ending the variation display of the decorative symbol. A variable effect end command instructing the execution of the process is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S19).

When this variation effect end command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the process of step S30, the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is the first. 1 As the special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. It will be displayed as stopped.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol determination command (step S18: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S21). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and is operated. It includes information indicating whether the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and when the effect key 27 is operated, information indicating which key is operated. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the operation command has been received (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the operation notification command in the sub RAM 133M (step S22). By transmitting this operation command to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, a process for realizing an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, a setting based on these operations, and the like can be performed. Will be done.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not an operation command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes other processing (step S23).

[Hold command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 13 of FIG. 47. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 adds "1" to the number of holds for special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133, as illustrated in FIG. 48. It is updated to the value (step S130). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. If this is the case, the number of pending second special symbol determinations is updated to the value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S131), and if it determines that the pre-determination information is not included (step S131: NO). , Set the icon display command (step S132).

This icon display command is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon indicating that the special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process in step S30. This icon display command includes the winning start port information, and the general CPU 141 of the image / sound control board 140 determines, for example, which special symbol determination of the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination is suspended. The hold icon is displayed in the corresponding display area (the first hold icon display area 51 if the first special symbol determination is held) by specifying based on the winning start port information.

If the received hold command does not include the pre-judgment information, the pre-effect based on the above-mentioned pre-judgment result cannot be performed. Therefore, when the process of step S132 is performed following the process of step S131, an icon display command that does not include the pre-judgment information is set, and a normal icon is displayed as a hold icon accordingly. become.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S131: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the pre-determination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S133).

Next, the sub CPU 131 executes the pre-production lottery (step S134). Specifically, first, the pre-effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133. This pre-effect random number is added by "1" each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the pre-effect random number, and the pre-effect random number is sub in advance. It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-effect based on whether or not it matches any of the random numbers related to the pre-effect random numbers stored in the ROM 132.

Although not shown in the figure, the random number value for holding the first special symbol determination stored in the sub ROM 132 has the following characteristics. That is, a combination in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" is associated with a larger number of random values than the combination in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". There is. Further, a combination of fluctuation patterns having a relatively long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is associated with a larger number of random values than a combination of fluctuation patterns having a relatively short fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Has been done. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the pre-effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the pre-effect.

The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the pre-effect based on the lottery result in step S134 (step S135), and when it is determined to execute the pre-effect (step S135: YES), for example, an effect using random numbers. A lottery is performed, one of a plurality of pre-effect effect patterns is selected, and the selected pre-effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S136).

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the pre-production and the lottery for selecting the production pattern for the pre-production are separate lottery has been described as an example, but whether or not to execute the pre-production is described. , In the case of execution, what kind of effect pattern to execute the pre-effect may be determined by one lottery.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S136, the sub CPU 131 sets an icon display command in the sub RAM 133 (step S132). As described above, by executing the process of step S132 following the process of step S136, the icon display command including the information indicating the pre-effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 133. Then, by transmitting this icon display command to the image / sound control board 140, the pre-effect is realized.

[Fluctuation start command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S15 of FIG. 47. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is the fluctuation start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a series of processes exemplified in FIG. 49.

That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received from the game control board 100 with respect to the effect random number that is appropriately updated by the above-mentioned random number update process, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S150). Then, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (step S151).

As described above, the fluctuation start command includes the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, and whether the setting information of this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. It includes information on the winning start port indicating whether or not the game is, information on setting a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a big hit or a loss, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit it is. Further, by specifying whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for loss based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. .. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received variation start command is the variation start command related to the "big hit" based on the analysis result (step S152). Here, if it is determined that the command is not the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit", the process proceeds to step S154 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received fluctuation start command is the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" (step S152: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process (step S153). The jackpot notice effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 50.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153, or when it is determined that the received fluctuation start command is not the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" (step S152: NO), the liquid crystal display is accompanied by the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The variable effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern of the variable effect performed on the screen 5 is executed (step S154). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the type of the decorative pattern constituting the reach pattern, the type and content of the reach effect, the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. Is determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 51.

Following the process of step S154, the sub CPU 131 executes a reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process for setting an effect pattern of a reliability suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot reliability such as a step-up effect and a dialogue notice (step S155). The reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the sub CPU 131 starts the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S154, and starts the variation effect instructing the execution of the reliability suggestion effect in the reliability suggestion effect pattern set in the process of step S155. The command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S157).

This variation effect start command includes at least information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S154 and information indicating the reliability suggestion effect pattern set by the process of step S155, and includes step S30. It is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of. As a result, the variation effect and the reliability suggestion effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 are realized by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

When the setting information related to the jackpot notice is set in the sub RAM 133 by the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process described later, a variable effect start command including this setting information is sent to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Will be sent. As a result, the jackpot notice set by the sub CPU 131 is realized.

Following the process of step S157, the sub CPU 131 subtracts "1" from the number of holds stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S158). Specifically, when the fluctuation start command received from the game control board 100 is a command related to the first special symbol determination, the pending number of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1". On the other hand, when the received fluctuation start command is a command related to the second special symbol determination, the pending number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Big hit notice effect pattern setting process by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot notice effect pattern setting process in step S153 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received fluctuation start command is the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" (step S152: YES), the sub CPU 131 acquires the jackpot advance notice random number and enters the sub RAM 133 as illustrated in FIG. Store (step S1530). The jackpot advance notice random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice, and "1" is added each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed. The sub CPU 131 acquires a count value at the time when it is determined that the fluctuation start command related to the jackpot has been received as a jackpot advance notice random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133.

Next, the sub CPU 131 reads the jackpot notice type selection table corresponding to the game state and the fluctuation pattern from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1531). As described above, the received fluctuation start command includes the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, and whether the setting information of this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. It includes information on a winning start port indicating whether or not the game is a game, information on setting a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The sub CPU 131 executes the following processing based on the information included in the fluctuation start command.

That is, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the fluctuation pattern B, the sub ROM 132 selects the first jackpot notice type. The table (see FIG. 29 (A)) is read out and set in the sub RAM 133.

Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the fluctuation pattern C, the sub ROM 132 selects the second jackpot notice type. The table (see FIG. 29B) is read out and set in the sub RAM 133.

Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern D (or variation pattern E), the sub ROM 132 starts from the sub ROM 132. The third big hit notice type selection table (see FIG. 29C) is read out and set in the sub RAM 133.

Further, when the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the fluctuation pattern M (or fluctuation pattern N), the sub ROM 132 starts from the sub ROM 132. The fourth jackpot notice type selection table (see FIG. 29 (D)) is read out and set in the sub RAM 133.

The above is the process when the normal mode is set, and when the jackpot notice up mode is set, any of the four selection tables for the jackpot notice up mode described above based on FIG. 34. One of the selection tables is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133.

Following the process in step S1531, the sub CPU 131 executes the jackpot notice effect type selection process (step S1532). In this jackpot advance notice effect type selection process, whether or not to execute each jackpot advance notice by reading the jackpot advance notice type corresponding to the jackpot advance notice random number acquired in the process of step S1530 from the selection table set in the process of step S1531. Is a process of determining which jackpot notice is to be executed when the jackpot notice is executed. Since this jackpot notice effect type selection process is as described above based on FIG. 29 and the like, detailed description here will be omitted.

Next, based on the processing result of step S1532, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot notice (step S1533). Here, when it is determined not to execute the jackpot notice (step S1533: NO), that is, when all the jackpot notice types read from the set selection table correspond to no jackpot notice, a series of jackpots The advance notice effect pattern setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to the variable effect pattern setting process in step S154.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot notice is to be executed (step S1533), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the jackpot notice can be executed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation (step S1534). Specifically, for each of the jackpot notices, information indicating the maximum number of times that can be executed within the same fluctuation is stored in the sub ROM 132, and the sub CPU 131 refers to the above information regarding the jackpot notice determined to be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not it can be executed multiple times within the same fluctuation. If it is determined that a plurality of types of jackpot notices will be executed, the determination process of step S1534 is performed for each of these jackpot notices.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot notice determined to be executed can be executed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation (step S1534: YES), the sub CPU 131 selects the number of executions and the execution timing (step S1535). Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot notice that can be executed at the first execution timing and the second execution timing within the same fluctuation, the first pattern in which the jackpot notice is executed only at the first execution timing and the second execution Random values are associated with each of the second pattern in which the jackpot notice is executed only at the timing and the third pattern in which the jackpot notice is executed at both the first execution timing and the second execution timing. Then, a random number for selecting one of the first pattern to the third pattern is acquired, and the execution number and execution timing of the jackpot notice are selected based on which pattern the acquired random number corresponds to. .. For example, when a random number corresponding to the first pattern is acquired, the number of executions is one and the first execution timing is selected. Further, for example, when a random number corresponding to the third pattern is acquired, the number of executions is two and both the first execution timing and the second timing are selected.

In the present embodiment, a jackpot notice that can be executed three or more times within the same fluctuation is also prepared. For this jackpot notice, the number of executions and the execution timing are selected in the same manner.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1535, or when it is determined that the jackpot notice determined to be executed cannot be executed multiple times within the same fluctuation (step S1534: NO), the jackpot notice type selection in step S1532 Information indicating the result of the process is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information for the jackpot notice effect (step S1536). When the process of step S1535 is executed prior to the process of step S1536, the setting information of the jackpot preview performance including the information indicating the number of executions and the selection result of the execution timing is set.

The setting information of the jackpot notice is included in the variation effect start command, and is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process in step S30. As a result, the jackpot notice corresponding to the setting information of the jackpot notice is realized by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Variable effect pattern setting process by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S154 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S153, or determines that the received fluctuation start command is not the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" (step S152: NO), the sub CPU 131 finally displays a stop on the liquid crystal screen 5. The decorative pattern to be (mainly stopped) is set (step S1540).

Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed at the end of the symbol variation, or the special symbol indicating the loss is displayed. It is specified whether the symbol is stopped and displayed, and if the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed, whether the special symbol is the jackpot symbol related to the probabilistic jackpot or the jackpot symbol related to the normal jackpot is determined. Identify. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol for notifying the probability variation jackpot is set. In the present embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot and 6R probability variation jackpot are prepared as probability variation jackpots related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, when the jackpot symbol X1 corresponding to the 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol of "777" is set, and when the jackpot symbol X2 corresponding to the 6R probability variation is stopped and displayed, "777" is set. Set a decorative pattern other than. Further, when the jackpot symbol X3 corresponding to the 6R normal is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol indicating the doublet of the odd number symbol is set. The same applies to the case of notifying the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination. On the other hand, when it is specified that the special symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed, a decorative symbol for notifying the loss is set. The decorative pattern for notifying this loss is a loose eye or a reach loss eye.

Following the process of step S1540, the sub CPU 131 reads out the variation effect pattern selection table for selecting the variation effect pattern of the variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1541). .. The sub ROM 132 stores a variation effect pattern selection table for jackpots and a variation effect pattern for loss. When a variation start command related to a jackpot is received, a variation effect pattern selection table for jackpots is stored. Is read and set in the sub RAM 133, and when the fluctuation start command related to the loss is received, the variation effect pattern selection table for the loss is read and set in the sub RAM 133.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect pattern (step S1542). Specifically, the variation effect pattern selection table is prepared for each variation pattern of the special symbol. When a variation start command including setting information indicating the variation pattern A related to the probability variation jackpot illustrated in FIG. 17 is received, the variation for the variation effect pattern A for setting the variation effect pattern A that hits before the reach is established. Set the production pattern selection table. In the variation effect pattern selection table for variation effect pattern A, four types of variation effect patterns A are defined, and different effect random numbers are associated with each variation effect pattern A.

Here, the first variation effect pattern is the variation effect pattern A in which the variation display of the decorative symbols in each column is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and then the collision effect is performed. The second variation effect pattern is the variation effect pattern A in which the variation display of the decorative symbols in each row is started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and then the collision effect is performed. The third variation effect pattern is the variation effect pattern A in which the variation display of the decorative symbols in each row is started in the order of the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol, and then the collision effect is performed. The fourth variation effect pattern is the variation effect pattern A in which the variation display of the three rows of decorative symbols is started at the same time and then the collision effect is performed.

The sub CPU 131 reads out the variation effect pattern of 1 corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step S150 from the variation effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 133, and sets the information in the sub RAM 133 to change the variation of 1. Set the production pattern.

As for the variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns other than the variation pattern A, a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each, and one variation effect pattern is set in the same manner as the above-mentioned variation effect pattern A. ..

Further, in the process of setting the variable effect pattern in step S1542, which symbol is used to establish the reach when performing the reach effect, which decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped as the reach symbol during normal reach, character SP reach, or SPSP reach. It is also decided whether to let it be done. In response to this process, when 7 symbol reach is established in the normal game state, it is suggested that the jackpot game has a relatively high probability of being executed, although the jackpot reliability is not 100%. On the other hand, if the 7 symbol reach is established in the probabilistic game state, the 16R probable variation becomes rich at that time, and the 7 symbol reach functions as a jackpot notice.

[Reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the reliability suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S155 of FIG. 49. Following the process of step S154 of FIG. 49, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not there is a jackpot notice setting using the reliability suggestion effect as illustrated in FIG. 52 (step S1550). Specifically, when the jackpot notice setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 according to the process of step S1536 (see FIG. 50), the setting information related to the jackpot notice using the reliability suggestion effect is used as the setting information. Is included or not. For example, the reliability suggestion effect such as title display, character display, and cut-in may function as a jackpot notice by being executed as a rainbow-colored title display, a rainbow-colored character display, and a rainbow-colored cut-in, respectively. Therefore, when the setting information of the jackpot notice includes the setting information such as the rainbow color title display, the rainbow color character display, and the rainbow color cut-in, it is determined as "YES" in the process of step S1550.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a jackpot notice setting using the reliability suggestion effect (step S1550: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the jackpot notice setting information includes the setting of the rainbow-colored title display (step S1550: YES). Step S1551). Here, when it is determined that the rainbow color title display setting is included (step S1551: YES), the display color of the title display is set to rainbow color, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1552). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow-colored title display setting is not included (step S1551: NO), the process proceeds to step S1553, which will be described later. The display color is set to blue or red.

As is clear from this, the title display usually functions as a reliability suggestion effect that suggests high or low jackpot reliability by being displayed in blue or red, but by being displayed in rainbow colors. , It functions as a jackpot notice that deterministically announces that the jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 23).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1552 or determines that the rainbow color title display is not set (step S1551: NO), does the jackpot notice setting information include the rainbow color cut-in setting? It is determined whether or not (step S1553). Here, when it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in setting is included (step S1553: YES), the display color of the cut-in is set to rainbow color (see FIG. 26 (D)), and the setting information is set. It is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1554). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rainbow color cut-in setting is not included (step S1553: NO), the process proceeds to step S1555 described later, but when the cut-in according to the operation is performed as a reliability suggestion effect. Is set to blue or red (see FIGS. 26B and 26C).

As is clear from this, the cut-in usually functions as a reliability suggestion effect that suggests high or low jackpot reliability by being displayed in blue or red, but by being displayed in rainbow color. , It functions as a jackpot notice that deterministically announces that the jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 26).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1554 or determines that the rainbow color cut-in is not set (step S1553: NO), does the jackpot notice setting information include the rainbow character display setting? It is determined whether or not (step S1555). Here, when it is determined that the rainbow-colored character display setting is included (step S1555: YES), the character display display color is set to rainbow-colored, and the setting information is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1556). ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rainbow-colored character display setting is not included (step S1555: NO), the process proceeds to step S1557, but when character display is performed as a reliability suggestion effect, the display color is used. Is set to blue or red.

As is clear from this, the character display usually functions as a reliability suggestion effect that suggests high or low jackpot reliability by being displayed in blue or red, but by being displayed in rainbow colors. , It functions as a jackpot notice that deterministically announces that the jackpot game will be executed (see FIG. 25).

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1556, when it is determined that there is no jackpot notice setting using the reliability suggestion effect (step S1550: NO), or when the jackpot notice setting information is set to display rainbow characters. When it is determined that the characters are not included (step S1555: NO), another effect pattern of the reliability suggestion effect is set (step S1557). Specifically, as other reliability suggestion effects, it is decided whether or not to execute various reliability suggestion effects that suggest the reliability of the jackpot such as dialogue notice and step-up notice, and the reliability suggestion effects are executed. In that case, a process or the like for determining the mode of execution is performed.

When there are multiple production modes with different reliability (expectation of big hit and expectation to shift to the probabilistic gaming state when it is a big hit) in the reliability suggestion effect, the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is the probabilistic big hit or the normal big hit. In some cases, it tends to be easy to select a highly reliable production mode, and it tends to be difficult to select a low reliability production mode (it may always be executed in a highly reliable production mode). Further, when the judgment result of the special symbol determination is lost, it is difficult to select a highly reliable effect mode, it is easy to select a low reliability effect mode, or the reliability suggestion effect is not easily executed. There is a tendency (it may always be performed in an unreliable production mode). From these facts, for example, when a variation pattern in which SPSP reach is executed is selected, a certain reliability suggestion effect (for example, title display) is a highly reliable effect mode (in this case, red title display: FIG. 24). When executed in (B)), it can be said that other reliability suggestion effects (for example, cut-in) are likely to be executed in a highly reliable effect mode (in this case, red cut-in: FIG. 26 (C)). Further, for example, when a variation pattern in which only a normal reach effect is executed is selected, when a certain reliability suggestion effect is executed in a low reliability effect mode, other reliability suggestion effects also have a low reliability effect mode. It can be said that it is easy to execute with. In this way, any reliability suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in an effect mode with higher reliability as the fluctuation time of the special symbol is longer, and conversely, it is executed in an effect mode with lower reliability as the variation time of the special symbol is shorter. It is easy to be done or not executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image / sound control board 140]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed on the image / sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 140. The image / sound control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 53 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. do.

First, the control CPU 141 executes an image output control process that controls the image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the command received from the effect control board 130 (step S41). This image output control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54.

Following the process of step S41, the general CPU 141 executes the effect sound output control process for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 24 so as to synchronize with or asynchronously with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Step S42). When a variable effect start command including information related to the setting of one notification is transmitted from the effect control board 130 as a jackpot notice, the process of this step S42 is executed to generate a special effect sound used for one notification. It will be output from the speaker 24.

Following the process in step S42, the centralized CPU 141 executes the data transmission control process (step S44). Specifically, data relating to the image / sound control performed on the image / sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image / sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the frame lamp 25, the effect button 26, the effect accessory 7, and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect executed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. That is, for example, in the case of the victory suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 11 (A) and 15 (G), the effect 7 is rotated while emitting rainbow colors.

[Image output control processing by the image / sound control board 140]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S41 of FIG. 53. First, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S411). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S42.

On the other hand, when the control CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S411: YES), the control CPU 141 sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 143 (step S412). Next, the general CPU 141 determines how various effect images should be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, and creates and controls a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 144. It is stored in the RAM 143 for use (step S413), and the display list is set in the display list storage area (step S414).

Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, and the rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list storage area is provided in a VRAM having a SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and the VDP 144 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the display list set in the display list storage area. Executes the drawing process of the displayed image.

[Action and effect of this embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, for example, the execution probabilities of the jackpot notice differ between the case where the fluctuation pattern A is selected and the case where the fluctuation pattern B is selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern with the higher probability of executing the jackpot notice.
Further, for example, since the jackpot notice executed when the fluctuation pattern A is selected and the jackpot notice executed when the fluctuation pattern B is selected are different from each other, the jackpot notice executed by executing the jackpot notice common to these fluctuation patterns is executed. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the appearance rate of the jackpot becomes higher than necessary, and as a result, the interest of the jackpot notice is lowered.
Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern B is selected, the normal reach is executed, but when the fluctuation pattern A is selected, the normal reach is not executed. Therefore, the player decides whether or not the normal reach is executed. Based on, it is possible to identify potential jackpot notices.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation pattern A is selected, the jackpot notice that can be executed when the fluctuation pattern B is selected (“premier character production” in this embodiment) is not executed, so that the jackpot notice is not executed. It is possible to more effectively suppress the problem that the execution probability of is higher than necessary.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation pattern B is selected, the hitting effect that can be executed when the fluctuation pattern A is selected is not executed, so that the execution probability of the jackpot notice becomes higher than necessary. It is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of problems such as storage.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the collision effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is executed is higher than the probability that the game is controlled in the normal game state. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively expect the player to select the variation pattern A and execute the collision effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in both the case where the variation pattern A is selected and the case where the variation pattern B is selected, a common effect such as high-speed variation of the decorative pattern is executed. For this reason, it becomes difficult to understand which fluctuation pattern is selected and which of the abrupt effect and the premier character effect may be executed, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the third time from the execution of the jackpot notice to the execution of the hit notification effect and the fourth time from the execution of the premier character effect to the execution of the hit notification effect. Are different from each other. Therefore, for example, when the third time is shorter than the fourth time, it is possible to give the player the impression that the execution of the jackpot game is notified relatively soon after the hitting effect is performed, which is high as a result. A directing effect can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the collision effect is executed within the same fluctuation for the fluctuation pattern A and the number of times the other jackpot notice is executed for the other fluctuation pattern are different from each other. The notices are diversified, and as a result, it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the hitting effect in which there is only one execution timing, it is possible to execute a big hit notice having a plurality of execution timings. Therefore, by executing the jackpot notice at the second execution timing without executing the jackpot notice at the first execution timing, the jackpot notice is not executed based on the fact that the jackpot notice was not executed at the first execution timing. It is possible to make the player who thought that he / she feel surprise and joy, and as a result, a high effect can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern C is selected, a capture success effect or a capture failure effect is performed as a result effect of the competition effect. Here, since the capture success effect functions as a jackpot notice for notifying that the jackpot game will be executed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the capture success effect to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect of notifying the establishment of reach or the reach effect is executed, another big hit notice is likely to be executed without executing the hit effect (even if it is always executed in the case of a big hit). good). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the appearance of another big hit notice different from the hitting effect after the reach is established and the reach effect is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, one aspect of the cut-in that can take a plurality of production modes functions as a jackpot notice. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a rainbow-colored cut-in is generated as a cut-in instead of a blue cut-in or a red cut-in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot notice is more likely to be executed when the pre-effect is executed than when the pre-effect is not executed (in the case of a jackpot, it may be executed without fail). Therefore, by executing the pre-effect, the player can expect the appearance of the jackpot notice even before the fluctuation is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the bumping effect, it is suggested that the jackpot game is executed and the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, the joy of the player can be increased as compared with the case of simply suggesting that the jackpot game is executed, and as a result, a high effect can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot notice different from when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state. Therefore, the variation of the jackpot notice can be improved as compared with the case of executing the common jackpot notice in these game states, and by executing the common jackpot notice, the jackpot notice itself becomes monotonous. It can be effectively suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot notice up mode is set, the execution probability of the hitting effect and the successful capture effect does not change, but the execution probability of other jackpot notices increases. Therefore, the player can easily enjoy other jackpot notices. On the other hand, since the execution probability of the hitting effect and the successful capture effect does not change, it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in the rarity value of these jackpot notices.

Further, in the present embodiment, a rainbow-colored cut-in, which is one of the jackpot notices, is executed according to the operation by the player. For this reason, it is possible to give the player motivation to perform the operation, and the player can feel as if he / she has assigned a big hit by performing the operation himself / herself, and as a result, it is high. A directing effect can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, a common jackpot notice (rainbow color title display, rainbow color cut-in, rainbow white character display) can be executed in the fluctuation pattern D and the fluctuation pattern E. Therefore, as a result, the appearance rate of these jackpot notices increases, and there is an advantage that the player can easily enjoy the jackpot notices.

[First variant regarding jackpot notice]
Next, a first modification of the jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen view showing a specific example of the first mission effect.

For example, in the first specific period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the predetermined character reaches with "4"! (See Fig. 55 (A)), and when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment performed at the start of the symbol change is "big hit", during this first specific period A mission success effect that the reach is established with four symbols may be performed, and this mission success effect may function as a jackpot notice (see FIGS. 55 (C) and 55 (D)).

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the special symbol determination is "missing", the mission failure effect indicating that the presented mission fails is executed without executing the mission success effect (see FIG. 55 (B)). ). It should be noted that FIG. 55 (B) illustrates a state in which a predetermined character emits a line such as "sorry ..." without establishing reach with the four symbols.

The decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed or the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed during the effect of presenting the first mission, the successful effect of the mission, and the failed effect of the mission.

In this way, the effect executed during the specific period (here, the mission success effect) may be executed as a jackpot notice. When the judgment result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", the first fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time of the first time is selected, and the fluctuation time is longer than the first time in the second time. In a situation where a second fluctuation pattern is sometimes selected, when a special symbol is variablely displayed in the second fluctuation pattern, the first mission effect illustrated in FIG. 55 and the subsequent missions are performed. It is conceivable to carry out a successful production. In another embodiment, the first mission effect and the mission success effect may be executed when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the first variation pattern.

[Second variant of jackpot notice]
Next, a second modification of the jackpot notice will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Here, FIG. 56 is a screen view showing a specific example of the second mission effect.

For example, in the second specific period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), the second such as "Destroy the enemy with repeated hits !!" with the reach established. (See FIG. 56 (A)). When this second mission is presented, the LCD screen 5 displays an effect display that notifies the remaining number of enemies, a button image that imitates the effect button 26, and "continuous hits!" That prompts the player to hit repeatedly. Character display and gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the valid period are performed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment performed at the start of the symbol change is "big hit", the remaining enemies become "0" bodies in response to repeated hits during this second specific period. The mission success effect of succeeding in annihilating the enemy may be performed, and this mission success effect may function as a jackpot notice (see FIGS. 56 (C) and 56 (D)).

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the special symbol determination is "missing", the mission failure effect indicating that the presented mission fails is executed without executing the mission success effect (see FIG. 56 (B)). ). In addition, in FIG. 56B, there is an effect display indicating that the second specific period of "0 seconds remaining" has ended, and "50" more enemies remain at the end of the second specific period. An example shows that an effect display indicating that the validity period has expired and a gauge image or the like indicating that the validity period has expired are displayed.

The second mission effect and the result effect, the mission success effect, may be performed when the special symbol is variablely displayed in the second variation pattern, or may be performed in the first variation pattern. This may be done when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed or the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed during the effect of presenting the second mission, the successful effect of the mission, and the failed effect of the mission. good.

[Other variants]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be, for example, the following embodiment. That is, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a so-called type 1 type pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention is applied to other gaming machines such as a type 1 type 2 type mixed type pachinko gaming machine. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability of various jackpot notices is 100% has been described, but the jackpot reliability of the jackpot notice does not necessarily have to be 100% if it is a relatively high value. , For example, a value other than 100% such as 99.99999% may be used.

Further, it goes without saying that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen view and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are also merely examples, and may be in other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case where a plurality of types of reliability suggestion effects and jackpot notices are executed before the reach is established will be described. In the following description, the same names, reference numerals, and step numbers will be assigned to the configurations and processes common to the first embodiment, and the description will be omitted, and the points different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the production is performed in any of the three production modes corresponding to the current gaming state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the normal mode is used, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic mode is used, and when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the time-saving mode is used. Each production is performed at. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of effect modes other than the time saving mode, the normal mode has a normal mode A and a normal mode B, and the probability change mode has a probability change mode A and a probability change mode B. ..

The effect mode itself has no reliability for jackpots, and each effect illustrated in FIG. 7 can be executed in either the normal mode A or the normal mode B, and either the probability change mode A or the probability change mode B can be executed. Even in the probabilistic mode, each effect illustrated in FIG. 8 can be executed.

However, in each effect mode, for example, the types of the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed, the types of the background image that can be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the types of the effect sounds (for example, music) that can be output are different from each other. By providing such a difference, when the game state is the same, the fluctuation time of the special symbol itself is the same, but the time required for the jackpot notification (that is, the type of reliability suggestion effect) can be different. , Different playability can be realized. In addition, the player can recognize the current production mode (that is, the current game state) based on, for example, the type of background image.

Specifically, for example, in the normal mode A, a background image showing a landscape in which clouds are floating in the blue sky is displayed, and an effect mode such as "normal mode A" is displayed except during the character SP reach and SPSP reach. A character indicating the type of is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. Further, in the normal mode B, a background image showing a landscape in which lightning falls from a cloudy sky is displayed, and characters indicating the type of production mode such as "normal mode B" are displayed on the screen except during the character SP reach and SPSP reach. Displayed in the upper left corner.

The normal mode A and the normal mode B are switched to each other when a predetermined condition without a transition of the gaming state is satisfied. For example, at the start of the next special symbol change (for example, on the condition that the determination result of the special symbol determination is continuously lost a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) during one of the effect modes (for example, in the normal mode A)). Alternatively, the other effect mode (in this case, normal mode B) is switched to immediately before the stop display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times. Further, on condition that the loss is notified by the highly reliable variation effect (for example, the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern J), the mode is switched to the other effect mode at the start of the next special symbol variation.

In the probabilistic mode A, a background image representing the landscape of the devastated city is displayed, and in the probabilistic mode B, a background image representing the landscape of the building city is displayed. The probabilistic mode A and the probabilistic mode B are production modes that can be shifted to the condition that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state. In the present embodiment, the probabilistic mode A and the probabilistic mode B are configured as an effect mode in which the probabilistic mode A and the probabilistic mode B are not switched to each other. You can select which of the following production modes to perform the production. Note that, for example, the next special symbol variation starts on the condition that the determination result of the special symbol determination is continuously lost a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) during one of the effect modes (for example, during the probability variation mode A). Occasionally, the mode may be switched to the other production mode (in this case, the probability variation mode B).

The time saving mode is an effect mode in which a background image showing the scenery on the shores of the lake is displayed. In the present embodiment, since only one effect mode time-saving mode is prepared corresponding to the time-saving game state, the mode is not switched to another effect mode during the time-saving game state. In addition, according to the transition from the time saving game state to the normal gaming state, the time saving mode is immediately switched to the normal mode A or the normal mode B.

In other embodiments, the reliability of the jackpot may be different for each effect mode (the effect mode functions as a so-called zone), and the normal mode A has a higher reliability than the normal mode B. It may be good or low.

The number of effect modes corresponding to the normal gaming state and the number of effect modes corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state may be 2 or more (for example, 4), and the number of effect modes corresponding to the time-saving gaming state may be 1 or more (for example, 4). For example, two) may be used. Further, even if the gaming states are different, the production may be performed in the same production mode. For example, in the normal gaming state, the production is performed in either the normal mode or the probabilistic mode, while in the probabilistic gaming state, the production is performed in a mode other than the normal mode (for example, the probabilistic modes A and B). May be done. In addition, the effect may be performed in the time saving mode when the probabilistic game state or the time saving game state is in effect.

[Variable pattern selection table used in the normal gaming state in the second embodiment]
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal gaming state in the second embodiment.

As illustrated in FIG. 57, the second embodiment is common to the first embodiment except that the types of variation effect patterns associated with the variation patterns D, E, I, and J are different from those of the first embodiment. Is. Hereinafter, the effect executed when the fluctuation patterns B to E and G to J are selected will be described.

When the fluctuation patterns B and G are selected by the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes the pre-reach effect for 5 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and then performs the normal reach. Run for 15 seconds. Similarly, when the fluctuation patterns C and H are selected, the pre-reach effect is executed for 10 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the normal reach is executed for 10 seconds, and then the character SP reach effect is executed for 20 seconds. do.

When the fluctuation patterns D and I are selected, the pre-reach effect is executed for 20 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and then the SPSP reach effect is executed for 20 seconds. In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation patterns D and I are selected, SPSP reach can be executed, but normal reach cannot be executed (normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

When the fluctuation patterns E and J are selected, the pre-reach effect is executed for 20 seconds from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the character SP reach is executed for 20 seconds, and then the SPSP reach effect is executed. In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation patterns E and J are selected, the character SP reach and the SPSP reach can be executed, but the normal reach cannot be executed (normal reach has an appearance rate of 0%).

As illustrated in FIG. 57, in the fluctuation pattern selection table of FIGS. 57 (A) to 57 (C), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern are the fluctuation patterns exemplified in FIG. Since they are the same, the following can be said. That is, the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to the start of the reach effect (that is, the execution time of the pre-reach effect), the easier it is to be selected in the case of a big hit, and the higher the reliability of the big hit. Further, when comparing the fluctuation effect patterns associated with the variation patterns D, E, I, and J, it is common that SPSP reach is executed as the reach effect. Rather than developing from pre-reach production to SPSP reach, it is more reliable to hit the jackpot if it develops from pre-reach production to character SP reach and then to SPSP reach. Therefore, it can be said that the longer the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to the start of the SPSP reach, the easier it is to be selected in the case of a big hit, and the higher the reliability of the big hit. The fluctuation pattern that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach may be selected only in the case of a big hit, or may not be selected in the case of a loss (that is, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern J is 0%).

<Hold icon change effect>
Next, in the normal mode A or the normal mode B, the “hold icon change effect” that can be executed when a preliminary determination result indicating that the fluctuation patterns B to E and G to J are selected is obtained will be described. The hold icon change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected. The "hold icon change effect" is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggests in advance what color the hold icon will change to, and is the target for which the pre-judgment result has been obtained (hereinafter, referred to as "look-ahead target"). It is a production that suggests the reliability of the jackpot. Specifically, in the hold icon change effect, for example, immediately before the hold icon related to the look-ahead target changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), a hold change suggestion image having the same color as the changed color is displayed. , Display for a predetermined time (eg, 0.5 seconds) near the changing hold icon.

The hold change suggestion image is, for example, an image similar to an enlarged display of the hold icon after the change. The color of the pending change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are prepared in advance. Since the reliability of each color of the pending change suggestion image is the same as the reliability of the color of the special icon, the description here is omitted.

In the present embodiment, the color of the hold icon always changes immediately after the hold icon change effect is executed. Therefore, it can be said that the hold icon change effect is an effect that changes the effect mode of the pre-effect.

The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a pre-effect pattern when a hold command is received from the game control board 100 in response to the game ball winning a prize in the first start port 11 (step S136 in FIG. 48). Following, the scenario of the hold icon change effect (color and execution timing of the hold change suggestion image) is set. The scenario of the hold icon change effect is determined based on, for example, a pre-effect pattern. Therefore, for example, in the case of a pre-effect pattern in which the color of the hold icon changes a plurality of times, a scenario for executing the hold icon change effect immediately before each change is set. Therefore, as with the pre-effect, the hold icon change effect is easier to execute for the jackpot than for the loss, and the shorter variation pattern is selected when the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is selected. Easier to execute than if selected. Therefore, when displaying the hold change suggestion image of a color with high reliability (for example, gold), the variation display of the look-ahead target is compared with the case of displaying the hold change suggestion image of a color with low reliability (for example, blue). In, a highly reliable effect (for example, the icon change effect that changes the icon to rainbow color, SPSP reach) is easily executed (may be always executed).

By the way, the hold icon change effect is an effect that draws attention to the hold icon. If such an effect is executed while the hold icon is hidden (for example, during SPSP reach), the color of the hold icon has changed before you know it. This may give a rough impression as a whole and may not be able to effectively enhance the effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a period during which the hold icon change effect cannot be executed is set in advance in relation to other effects, and the above scenario is not referred to (or the above scenario is discarded) during this period and is held. It adopts a configuration that controls the icon change effect infeasibly. During the period when the hold icon change effect cannot be executed, the special icon that has already been displayed will continue to be displayed, but by not referring to the pre-effect pattern, a new pre-effect cannot be executed for the hold icon. Control.

For example, when a variable effect for notifying a jackpot is being executed, or when there is a hold for a jackpot, a configuration is adopted in which the hold icon change effect (and a new pre-effect) is not executed (that is, the appearance rate). 0%). When the variation effect for notifying the loss is executed, the execution of the hold icon change effect is controlled as illustrated in FIG. 58.

FIG. 58 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the hold icon change effect can be executed and a period in which the hold icon change effect cannot be executed. Here, the relationship with the reach effect will be mainly described, and the relationship with other reliability suggestion effects will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

As illustrated in FIG. 58 (A), when the variation pattern G is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in a lost manner, the hold icon change effect is before reach. It can be executed during production and normal reach. That is, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) is infeasibly controlled during the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbol in the lost mode.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 58 (B), when the variation pattern I is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the SPSP reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in a lost manner, the hold icon change effect is performed. Can only be performed during pre-reach production. That is, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) is infeasibly controlled during the SPSP reach and during the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in a lost manner.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 58 (C), when the variation pattern J is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the character SP reach, the SPSP reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in a lost mode. The hold icon change effect can only be performed during the pre-reach effect. That is, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) is infeasibly controlled during the character SP reach, the SPSP reach, and during the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbol in a lost manner.

Although the illustration of the variation pattern H is omitted, if the variation pattern H is selected and the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, the character SP reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in the lost mode are executed, it is reserved. The icon change effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect and during the normal reach. That is, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) is infeasibly controlled during the character SP reach and during the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in a lost manner.

Further, although the illustration is omitted for the variation pattern for loss without reach, when such a variation pattern is selected to execute the pre-reach effect and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol in the loss mode, the hold icon is displayed. The change effect can be performed during the pre-reach effect. That is, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) is infeasibly controlled during the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbol in the lost mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 58, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) in the present embodiment can be executed before the start of the character SP reach and before the start of the SPSP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol. It is not executed after the start of these reach effects (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other words, the hold icon change effect (and the new pre-effect) can be executed while the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed, but cannot be executed while the decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the jackpot is notified. Therefore, for example, when the hold icon change effect is executed during the normal reach and the normal reach develops into the SP reach, the hold icon change effect is executed so that the loss is notified by the change effect being executed. There is a risk that it can be predicted. However, it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue the game because he / she can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit for the special icon changed by executing the hold icon change effect. In another embodiment, the hold icon change effect (and a new pre-effect) is executed in the variable effect in which the jackpot is notified (that is, during the effect executed when the variable patterns A to E are selected). It may be executed during the stop display of the first special symbol.

Further, a variation pattern in which the hold icon change effect (and a new pre-effect) can be executed and a variation pattern in which the hold icon change effect cannot be executed may be set in advance. For example, the hold icon change effect (and a new pre-effect) can be executed when the variation pattern G is selected, and may not be executable when the variation patterns HI to I are selected, and whether or not it is a big hit. Regardless of this, if a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect (for example, SPSP reach) is executed is selected, it may not be feasible.

Further, in another embodiment, the hold icon change effect (and a new pre-effect) may be controlled to be infeasible during normal reach, may be executed during character SP reach, or may be executed during SPSP reach. You may do it. In addition, the appearance rate of the hold icon change effect (and new pre-effect) may be lower during the effect with higher reliability for the jackpot. For example, the appearance rate may be in the relationship of pre-reach production> = normal reach> character SPSP reach> SPSP reach> 0%, or pre-reach production = normal reach = character SPSP reach> SPSP reach> 0. It may be a% relationship.

The hold icon change effect may also be executed in the probability change mode A and the probability change mode B (that is, the probability change game state). For example, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the hold icon change effect (and pre-effect) is controlled to be feasible during the non-reach effect and before the start of the battle reach (that is, during the pre-reach effect), while after the start of the battle reach. May be infeasibly controlled. For example, when the hold icon change effect is executed in the probabilistic mode than in the normal mode, the jackpot expectation and the expectation of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state when the jackpot is a big hit may be higher or lower. It may be the same or it may be the same.

The hold icon change effect suggests a predetermined reliability in a predetermined situation (for example, in the case of the normal mode A or in the probability variation mode, the variation display of the look-ahead target or the variation display prior to the look-ahead target). In the effect (for example, when the background effect or the symbol change effect described later) is executed, it may be executed only in the case of a big hit, and may not be executed in the case of a loss. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the hold icon change effect but also in other effects (including the effect mode itself).

In another embodiment, the hold icon change effect and the pre-effect may be configured as one effect. In addition, there may be a case where the pre-effect is executed after the hold icon change effect and a case where the pre-effect is not executed (so-called ghost), and the ghost is also controlled to be infeasible during the period when the hold icon change effect cannot be executed. You may.

<Icon change production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the “icon change effect” that can be executed when the fluctuation patterns B to E and G to J are selected in the normal mode A or the normal mode B will be described. The icon change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A or the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected.

The "icon change effect" is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggests in advance what color the icon will change to, and is an effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot of the variable effect being executed. In the present embodiment, the color of the icon always changes immediately after the "icon change effect" is executed (that is, the effect mode of the pre-effect changes). Specifically, in the icon change effect, for example, immediately before the icon changes to another color (for example, 0.5 seconds before), the icon change suggestion image having the same color as the changed color is changed. Display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) near the icon.

The icon change suggestion image is, for example, an image similar to an enlarged display of the icon after the change, and is an image having the same aspect as the image used as the pending change suggestion image. The color of the icon change suggestion image is the same as the color of the special icon, and five types of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are prepared in advance. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the icon change suggestion image and the icon for each color is 3% for "blue", 16% for "green", 45% for "red", and "gold". Is 65% and "rainbow" is 100%. When displaying an icon change suggestion image of a highly reliable color (for example, gold), a highly reliable effect (for example, for example) is displayed as compared with displaying an icon change suggestion image of a low reliability color (for example, blue). Night background, SPSP reach) is easy to execute (may be executed without fail).

The icon change effect is an effect that changes the effect mode of the pre-effect as well as the hold icon change effect. However, the icon change effect is not a hold icon but an effect of changing the icon, and a hold icon is an effect executed based on the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment instead of the pre-judgment information. It is different from the change production.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect at the start of the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 of FIG. 52). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to the icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and randomly determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on information on whether or not it is a big hit. It will be decided by lottery.

The icon change effect execution lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not the icon change effect is executed is predetermined. In the case of a big hit, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 39" is assigned to the judgment result of "execution" of the icon change effect (execution ratio 40%). ), A judgment value of "40 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "not executing" the icon change effect (60% of not executing). On the other hand, in the case of loss, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 29" is assigned to the judgment result of "execute" (execution ratio 30%), and "execute". A judgment value of "30 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "do not execute" (ratio of not executing 70%).

In this way, the icon change effect is more likely to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit than when the icon change effect is lost. Therefore, when the icon change effect is executed, the reliability is higher than when the icon change effect is not executed. Can be recognized by a person.

In the icon change effect, for example, a predetermined reliability suggestion effect (for example, a background effect or a pattern change effect described later) is executed under a predetermined situation (for example, in the case of the normal mode A or in the probability change mode). In the case of a big hit, it may be executed only, and in the case of a loss, it may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the icon change effect but also in other effects (including the effect mode itself).

If the hold icon (pre-effect effect mode) is "rainbow" in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect, the pre-effect effect mode cannot be changed any further. It is not feasible (see Figure 59). Therefore, the icon change effect is a reliability suggestion effect that may be executed when the hold icon is not a rainbow.

When it is determined to execute the icon change effect, the sub CPU 131 refers to, for example, the icon display mode determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and information on whether or not it is a big hit and a variation pattern. The change pattern of the icon is determined by a random number lottery based on the type.

In the icon display mode determination table, for example, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining a change pattern of the icon and a color of the hold icon immediately before being displayed as the icon (hereinafter, "final color at hold"). This is a table in which the color change pattern of the icon until the icon is erased is associated with each other in advance.

Here, the change pattern of the icon will be described. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the icon at the time of loss. The "first changing color" in FIGS. 59 and 60 is the color that changes first after the hold icon is displayed as the icon, and the "final color at that time" is immediately before the icon is erased. The color. Further, "no change" indicates that the icon change effect is not executed (that is, the color of the icon does not change or cannot be changed any more). In the "ratio" column in FIGS. 59 and 60, how many judgment values are assigned among the judgment values of "0 to 99" to be compared with the random numbers for determining the change pattern of the icon. Is shown.

In the present embodiment, the change pattern of the icon includes a pattern that directly changes from the first change color to the final color at that time (the number of times the icon change effect is executed twice), and the first change color is the final color at that time. (The number of times the icon change effect is executed once), and the pattern that changes to the final color at that time through the change from the first change color to another color (the number of times the icon change effect is executed 3 times or more). There is.

As illustrated in FIG. 59, when the jackpot is a big hit and the fluctuation patterns B to E are selected, if the final color on hold is "white", the final colors at that time are "blue", "green", and "red". , "Gold", or "rainbow" are 2%, 5%, 39%, 53%, and 1%, respectively. Therefore, among the determination values of "0 to 99", the determination value of "0, 1" is assigned to the determination result that the final color is "blue" at that time, and the determination result of "green". A judgment value of "2 to 6" is assigned to, and a judgment value of "7 to 45" is assigned to the judgment result of "red", and a judgment value of "gold" is assigned to the judgment result. A determination value of "46 to 98" is assigned, and "99" is assigned as a determination value to the determination result of "rainbow".

If it is a big hit and the fluctuation patterns B to E are selected and the final color on hold is "blue" or "green", the final color at that time is "red", "gold", or "rainbow". The ratios are 40%, 58%, and 2%, respectively. Therefore, among the determination values of "0 to 99", the determination value of "0 to 39" is assigned to the determination result that the final color is "red" at that time, and the determination result of "gold". A determination value of "40 to 97" is assigned to the determination value, and "98, 99" is assigned as a determination value to the determination result of "rainbow".

As illustrated in FIG. 60, in the case of loss, the ratio for each change pattern depending on which of 0 to 3 is the number of pending first special symbol determinations at the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Is different. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation patterns G to J are selected due to loss and the final color at the time of holding is "white", the number of holdings for the first special symbol determination is 0. The time and the time when it is 1 will be described.

In this case, if the number of pending first special symbol determinations is 0, the ratio of the final colors being "blue", "green", "red", "gold", or "rainbow" at that time is 60%, respectively. , 27%, 10%, 3%, 0%. Therefore, among the determination values of "0 to 99", the determination value of "0 to 59" is assigned to the determination result that the final color is "blue" at that time, and the determination result of "green". A judgment value of "60 to 86" is assigned to, and a judgment value of "87 to 96" is assigned to the judgment result of "red", and a judgment value of "gold" is assigned to the judgment result. The judgment value of "97 to 99" is assigned, and the judgment value is not assigned to the judgment result of "rainbow" (when lost, the appearance rate of the rainbow is 0%).

If the number of pending 1st special symbol determinations is 1, the ratio of the final colors being "blue", "green", "red", "gold", or "rainbow" at that time is 65%, respectively. It is 26%, 7%, 2% and 0%. Therefore, among the determination values of "0 to 99", the determination value of "0 to 64" is assigned to the determination result that the final color is "blue" at that time, and the determination result of "green". A judgment value of "65 to 90" is assigned to, and a judgment value of "91 to 97" is assigned to the judgment result of "red", and a judgment value of "gold" is assigned to the judgment result. The judgment value of "98, 99" is assigned, and the judgment value is not assigned to the judgment result of "rainbow" (the appearance rate of the rainbow is 0% at the time of loss).

As illustrated in FIGS. 59 and 60, in the present embodiment, the higher the reliability of the final color on hold, the more likely the final color at that time is to become a highly reliable color. Specifically, at the time of a big hit, the final color at the time of holding is white, and then the color of the icon (the production mode of the pre-production) becomes blue according to the execution of the icon change effect, and then gold. The probability of becoming is 21% (= 0.4 × 0.53 × 100). In addition, when the color of the hold icon (the effect mode of the pre-effect) becomes blue in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect at the time of a big hit, the corresponding icon change effect is subsequently executed. The probability that the icon will be gold is 23% (= 0.4 x 0.58 x 100).

In addition, the probability that the final color on hold is white at the time of loss, and then the color of the icon turns blue and then becomes gold according to the execution of the icon change effect is 0.9% (= 0). .3 × 0.03 × 100). In addition, if the color of the hold icon turns blue in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect at the time of loss, the probability that the icon will become gold in response to the subsequent execution of the icon change effect is It is 3.9% (= 0.3 × 0.13 × 100).

In addition, the probability of each final color on hold that the final color at that time becomes a rainbow according to the execution of the icon change effect is higher in the order of white <blue (or green) <red <gold. As a result, it is possible to expect that the more reliable the color of the hold icon becomes, the more the icon becomes a rainbow.

As a result, the more reliable the hold icon is, the more reliable the icon is likely to be. Further, even if the color of the hold icon is the same, the jackpot is more likely to have a highly reliable color than the loss. As a result, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot from the time when the hold icon is displayed in a highly reliable manner. When the hold icon is in the first predetermined mode (for example, green) or higher, the icon corresponding to the hold icon may always be in the second predetermined mode (for example, rainbow color or gold).

As illustrated in FIG. 60, in the case of loss, the smaller the number of holds, the more likely the final color is to be a highly reliable color in the present embodiment. When the number of pending items is a predetermined number (for example, 0), the final color at that time may be a predetermined color (for example, blue).

In another embodiment, the higher the reliability of the final color on hold, the less likely it is that the final color at that time will be a color with higher reliability (the final color at that time will always be equal to or higher than the final color on hold). It doesn't have to be). Further, the lower the reliability of the final color at the time of holding, the more likely the final color at that time becomes a color with high reliability (for example, when the final color at the time of holding is a predetermined color (for example, blue), at that time. The final color may be iridescent). Also, in the case of a big hit, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of holding, the more reliable the final color at that time is, while in the case of loss, the higher the reliability of the final color at the time of holding, the more the final color at that time. May not be a reliable color.

Further, in another embodiment, the icon change effect is changed between a variation pattern in which a highly reliable effect on the jackpot (for example, SPSP reach) can be executed and a variation pattern in which only a low reliability effect (for example, normal reach) is executed. The pattern may be determined at different rates. For example, in the fluctuation pattern E, the final color may be more likely to be a highly reliable color at that time than in the fluctuation pattern B (a predetermined color with a high reliability always corresponds to the fluctuation pattern E). May be.). Further, the final color of the fluctuation pattern J may be more likely to be a highly reliable color at that time than the fluctuation pattern G (even if the final color is always a predetermined color having a high reliability corresponding to the fluctuation pattern J). good.). Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer may make the final color more reliable or less likely to be the final color at that time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a period during which the icon change effect can be executed and a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed will be described. FIG. 61 is a time chart showing a specific example of a period in which the icon change effect can be executed and a period in which the icon change effect cannot be executed. Here, the relationship with the reach effect will be mainly described, and the relationship with other reliability suggestion effects will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon is displayed until immediately before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by changing the icon at various timings during the variation display of the first special symbol, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the jackpot will be notified by the variation effect during execution. However, by paying attention to the icon by executing the icon change effect, the player's consciousness may be deviated from other effects being executed, and the interest may not be enhanced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a period during which the icon change effect cannot be executed is determined in advance in relation to other effects, and the icon change effect is controlled to be executable other than during this period. .. In the present embodiment, the color of the icon (that is, the effect mode of the pre-effect related to the icon) does not change unless the icon change effect is executed. Therefore, during the period when the icon change effect cannot be executed, the effect mode of the pre-effect related to the icon does not change.

As illustrated in FIG. 61 (A), when the variation pattern A is selected, the icon change effect cannot be executed from the start of the variation of the first special symbol to the stop display.

As illustrated in FIG. 61 (B), when the variation pattern B or G is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol, the icon change effect is the pre-reach effect. Can only be done during. That is, during the normal reach and during the effect of actually stopping the decorative symbol, the icon change effect is controlled to be infeasible. In the fluctuation patterns B and G, since the winning is notified immediately after the start of the normal reach (for example, 10 seconds later), if the icon changes during the normal reach, it may give a rushing impression. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation patterns B and G are selected, the icon change does not change during the normal reach, thereby effectively preventing the player from giving a busy impression. There is.

As illustrated in FIG. 61 (C), when the variation pattern D or I is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the SPSP reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol, the icon change effect is before the reach. It can be performed during the production and during some periods during the SPSP reach. Specifically, during the SPSP reach, it cannot be executed during the title display and the production after the operation promotion effect, and can be executed during the battle effect.

As illustrated in FIGS. 23 and 24 (C) and 24 (D), since the title display itself functions as a reliability suggestion effect, the icon change effect having the same function is not executed during the title display. It is configured as follows. In another embodiment, the icon change effect may be controlled to be executable while the title is displayed. In the case of such a configuration, even if a blue title display having a relatively low reliability for the jackpot is displayed, the icon is a highly reliable color (for example, gold or rainbow) due to the icon change effect during the title display. Color) may change. As a result, the player can continue the game without losing the expectation for the subsequent development.

As illustrated in FIG. 26, the operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 26, and the player's consciousness is directed to the button image, the gauge image, and the effect button 26 (and the up key and down key). It is a production that makes you point. If the icon changes during such an effect, the player may be surprised and may not be able to perform an appropriate operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the icon change does not change during the operation promotion effect, the player can concentrate on the operation promotion effect and perform an appropriate operation.

As illustrated in FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (D), the cut-in itself functions as a reliability suggestion effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during the cut-in for the same reason as during the title display.

After the cut-in, in the case of a big hit, after the victory notification effect and the effect of pseudo-stopping the decorative symbols of the second aspect with the symbols aligned are executed, the decorative symbols of the first aspect are pseudo-stopped with the symbols aligned. The big hit is notified by this stop. Further, in the case of loss, after the decorative symbol of the second aspect is pseudo-stopped at the reach loss eye, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped at the reach loss eye, and then the loss is notified. Even if the icon changes even more during the production of such a winning notification, there is a possibility that the production effect cannot be effectively enhanced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect is not executed after the cut-in.

As illustrated in FIG. 61 (D), when the variation pattern E or J is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the character SP reach, the SPSP reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol, the icon changes. The production can be performed during the pre-reach production, during the character SP reach, and during a part of the SPSP reach. Specifically, during the character SP reach, it is not feasible during the title display and the capture failure production (and the development suggestion production), and it is feasible during the competition production. It should be noted that during the SPSP reach, the control is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 61 (C), and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

As illustrated in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the title display related to the character SP reach itself functions as a reliability suggestion effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during the title display related to the character SP reach for the same reason as during the title display related to the SPSP reach.

During the capture failure production, it may be a loss, but the player may watch the progress of the production with the expectation that the development suggestion production may be executed. If the icon changes during such an effect (for example, it changes to a rainbow color that announces that it is a big hit), there is a possibility that the sense of crisis that it may be lost cannot be effectively increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed during the capture failure effect.

In addition, during the development suggestion effect performed when developing from the character SP reach to the SPSP reach, the player may increase the expectation for the SPSP reach while being pleased that the variable effect continues. If the icon changes during such an effect, the expectation becomes too high, and there is a risk of disappointment if the blue title display is displayed at the start of SPSP reach. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the icon change does not change during the development suggestion production.

Although the illustration of the variation patterns C and H is omitted, when the variation pattern C or H is selected to execute the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, the character SP reach, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol. The icon change effect can be executed during the pre-reach effect, the normal reach, and the scramble effect in the character SP reach. On the other hand, the icon change effect is infeasibly controlled during the title display in the character SP reach, the capture failure effect, the capture success effect, and the effect of stopping the decorative symbol.

Further, although the illustration of the variation pattern for loss without reach is not shown, if the icon change effect is executed when the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, the player feels uncomfortable and rather. There is a risk of reducing the effect of the effect. Therefore, when the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, the icon change effect is controlled to be infeasible.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a short fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern for loss without reach and a fluctuation pattern A which is 13.5 seconds or less) is selected, the icon change effect is not executed and is relative. When a long variation pattern B to E or G to J is selected, the icon change effect can be executed.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect (and the pre-effect related to the icon) can be executed during the display of either the decorative symbol of the first aspect or the decorative symbol of the second aspect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon change effect is executed during the pre-reach effect or the normal reach is more than the case where the icon change effect is executed during the character SP reach or the SPSP reach. It is configured so that the jackpot can be easily notified. In other words, when the icon change effect is executed while the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed, the jackpot is more likely to be notified than when it is executed while the decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed (always). It may be a big hit). It should be noted that the jackpot may be more easily notified when the icon change effect is executed during the character SP reach or SPSP reach than when the icon change effect is executed during the pre-reach effect or normal reach (always). It may be a big hit), and the jackpot expectations do not have to be different.

If a revival effect is executed in which the three decorative symbols with the same symbols are pseudo-stopped after pretending to be a loss at the end of the SPSP reach, the icon may be executed. For example, after the effect of pretending to be a loss by pseudo-stopping the decorative symbol of the first aspect with the reach loss eye, and before the start of the revival effect (or the revival effect) of pseudo-stopping the decorative symbol of the first aspect in the form of matching the symbols. At the start), the color of the icon may be changed to rainbow color according to the execution of the icon change effect. During the icon change effect, the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed, or the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed.

Further, in the SPSP reach, the icon change effect may be executably controlled after the operation promotion effect. In the case of such a configuration, for example, it is configured so that the jackpot is more easily notified when the icon change effect is executed after the operation promotion effect than when the icon change effect is not executed after the operation promotion effect. It may be a jackpot (it may always be a jackpot), and the jackpot expectations do not have to be different.

In addition, if the development suggestion effect is executed following the capture failure effect, the icon change effect can be executed during the capture failure effect, and if the non-development suggestion effect is executed following the capture failure effect, the capture failure. The icon change effect may be controlled to be infeasible during the effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the icon change effect is executed during the capture failure effect, which leads to the development of SPSP reach and the high expectation of big hit.

Further, the icon change effect may be controlled to be executable during the development suggestion effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation for the jackpot by the synergistic effect of the development suggestion effect and the icon change effect.

The icon change effect may also be executed in the probability change mode A and the probability change mode B (that is, the probability change game state). For example, while the icon change effect (and the pre-effect related to the icon) is executably controlled during the variable display of the second special symbol during the non-reach effect and before the start of the battle reach (that is, during the pre-reach effect), while After the start of battle reach, it may be controlled to be infeasible (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). Alternatively, the relationship of the appearance rate of the icon change effect may be controlled so that the relationship is such that during the effect without reach and before the start of battle reach (that is, during the effect before reach)> after the start of battle reach> 0%. For example, when the icon change effect is executed in the probabilistic mode than in the normal mode, the jackpot expectation and the expectation of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state when the jackpot is a big hit may be higher or lower. It may be the same or it may be the same.

<Pseudo-continuous production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63, in the normal mode A or the normal mode B, the fluctuation patterns B to E, G to J, or the fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss with a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds is selected. The "pseudo-continuous production" that can be executed in this case will be described. When the variation pattern for loss without reach or the variation pattern A whose variation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect and the reliability. In FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the notation of characters indicating the type of effect mode is omitted.

The pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 62) is an effect executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and is a variable display so as to scroll all the pseudo-stopped decorative symbols of the first aspect at high speed again. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "restart".) This is one of the reliability suggestion effects. For example, when the decorative symbol is restarted once by the pseudo-continuous effect, it seems that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed twice during the one variable display of the special symbol. For example, when a "pseudo-ream symbol" (FIGS. 62 (A) (c) and (B) (c)) is pseudo-stopped on the effective line for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), all of them are simulated by the pseudo-ream effect. The decorative symbol of (see, for example, FIGS. 16 (A), (c) and (d)) is restarted. The pseudo-ream symbol is a special symbol (a decorative symbol that is not used during normal variable display) that suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream effect.

The pseudo continuous effect can be executed 0 to 3 times, and is an effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot depending on how many times it is executed. The jackpot tends to be executed more times than the loss, and can be executed three times only in the case of the jackpot. Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long, the number of executions tends to be large (for example, 2 times), and when the fluctuation time is short, the number of executions tends to be small (for example, 0 times or 1 time). The number of executions may be one or more in the case of a big hit, and may be zero in the case of a loss.

There are two types of pseudo-continuous production, "normal pseudo-continuous production" and "story pseudo-continuous production", and one of them during the non-reach production or the pre-reach production (that is, during the display of the decorative pattern of the first aspect). It is possible to execute the pseudo-continuous production of. The "normal pseudo-continuous effect" is an effect that does not involve a change in the background image, and the "story pseudo-continuous effect" is an effect that involves a change in the background image.

In the present embodiment, the type of pseudo-continuous effect and the number of executions thereof are determined to be one of 0 to 3 times based on the fluctuation pattern determined when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. .. Specifically, when the variation pattern for loss without reach or the variation pattern B, C, G, H with the variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected, the variation pattern D, I can be executed 0 times or once. When, J is selected, it can be executed 0 to 2 times (it may be executed twice without fail). When the variation pattern E is selected, it can be executed 0 to 3 times (it may be executed twice or more without fail). The number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production may be uniquely determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

Since the pseudo continuous effect is executed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect, the reach may be established or the reach may not be established after the pseudo continuous effect is executed. When the fluctuation patterns B to E and G to J are selected, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed so that the reach is always established after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 62 (A), when the "normal pseudo-continuous production" is performed once, for example, the following production is performed. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, the pseudo first series of variable display in which the decorative symbol of the first aspect is scrolled at high speed for a time shorter than the variable time of the special symbol is started. (See FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (a)).

Then, for example, at the end of the variable display of the pseudo first series, the left symbol and the right symbol (both of which are the decorative symbols of the first aspect) composed of different decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the center of the screen, and then the pseudo-ream as the middle symbol. A symbol (for example, a special symbol representing the Chinese character "ream") is pseudo-stopped on the effective line (see FIGS. 62 (A), (b) and (c)). When the pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are restarted by performing the first pseudo-continuous effect. From this, the pseudo second variation display is started (see, for example, FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (d)).

In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is restarted, the effector 7 is operated in an operation pattern for notifying the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect toward the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (d)). Along with this, an effect image for notifying the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect object 7.

When the operation of the effecting object 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (e), a character indicating a pseudo-ream number such as “x2” (a character indicating that it is a pseudo-second station) is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Displayed in the corner. Further, along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen, a pseudo-ream effect image of a predetermined color indicating the pseudo-ream number (for example, green indicating that it is the pseudo-second station) is displayed. The decorative symbol being restarted is the decorative symbol of the first aspect.

As illustrated in FIG. 62 (B), when the "story pseudo-continuous production" is performed once, for example, the following production is performed. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, first, the pseudo first series of variable display in which the decorative symbol of the first aspect is scrolled at high speed for a time shorter than the variable time of the special symbol is started. (See FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the effect 7 is in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 with an operation pattern suggesting that the story pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the pseudo-first variable display is started. It is operated in the direction (see FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (a)). Along with this, an effect image similar to the effect image for notifying the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect object 7.

When the operation of the effect character 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (b), a story image in which the ally character represents the past is displayed on the entire screen. Along with this, a directing sound (for example, a narration that introduces the past of a ally character) related to the content of this image is output from the speaker 24. As a result, the player can know the background of the ally character and recognize that the story pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Then, for example, at the end of the pseudo first series of variable display, the left symbol and the right symbol (both of which are the decorative symbols of the first aspect) composed of different decorative symbols are simulated in the center of the screen while the story image is displayed on the entire screen. After being stopped, a pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a special symbol representing "su" in katakana) is pseudo-stopped on the effective line as a middle symbol (see FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (c)). In the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol related to the story pseudo-ream effect is not normally used when the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player which pseudo-ream effect is executed depending on the type of the pseudo-ream symbol. In addition, the same pseudo-continuous pattern may be used for the normal pseudo-continuous production and the story pseudo-continuous production.

When the pseudo-ream symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are restarted by performing the first story pseudo-ream effect. From this, the pseudo second variation display is started (see, for example, FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (d)).

In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is restarted by executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, the effect character 7 is operated in the same operation pattern as when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed. (See FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (d)). Along with this, an effect image similar to the effect image for notifying the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is displayed as the background of the effect object 7.

When the operation of the effect 7 is completed, as illustrated in FIGS. 62 (B) and 62 (e), the story image related to the pseudo second station, which is a continuation of the story image related to the pseudo first station, is displayed on the entire screen. Will be done. Along with this, a directing sound (for example, a narration that introduces the past of a ally character) related to the content of this image is output from the speaker 24. The decorative symbol being restarted is the decorative symbol of the first aspect. Note that, unlike the case where the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed twice. When the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice, the second pseudo continuous effect is performed after the first pseudo continuous effect is performed. Refer to FIG. 62 when the second pseudo-continuous effect is performed, except that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the pseudo-second variable display instead of the pseudo-first variable display. The production of the flow is almost the same as the production explained in the above. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol (both are decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variation display of the pseudo second series, the pseudo series symbol is simulated as the middle symbol. It is stopped (see FIG. 63 (c)). When the pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle symbol, all the decorative symbols are restarted by performing the second pseudo continuous effect. From this, the pseudo-third continuous variation display is started. For example, when the normal pseudo-ream effect is executed, a character indicating the pseudo-ream number such as "x3" is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen during the variable display of the pseudo-third station, or the pseudo-third station is displayed. A pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, red) indicating that is displayed along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen (see, for example, FIG. 72 (F)). If the reach is established during the variable display of the pseudo-third station, for example, all the images related to the pseudo-continuous effect are erased, the reach effect is developed, and the SPSP reach is always executed (see FIG. 63 (d)). ..

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation patterns D and E are selected, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed three times. When the pseudo-continuous production is performed three times, the third pseudo-continuous production is performed after the second pseudo-continuous production is performed. This third pseudo-continuous production functions as a big hit notice that definitely announces that it will be a big hit. Refer to FIG. 62 when the third pseudo-continuous effect is performed, except that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the pseudo-third variable display instead of the pseudo-first variable display. The production of the flow is almost the same as the production explained in the above. Although detailed description is omitted, when the third pseudo-continuous production is performed, after the left symbol and the right symbol (both are decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variation display of the pseudo-third series. , The pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol (see FIG. 63 (e)). When the pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) as the middle symbol, all the decorative symbols are restarted by performing the third pseudo-continuous effect. From this, the pseudo fourth variable display is started. For example, when the normal pseudo-ream effect is executed, a character indicating the pseudo-ream number such as "x4" is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen during the variable display of the pseudo-series, or the pseudo-ream is the fourth. A pseudo-continuous effect image of a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that is displayed along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen (not shown). Further, the frame lamp 37 emits light in rainbow colors while displaying these images. If the reach is established during the variable display of the pseudo 4th station, for example, all the images related to the pseudo continuous effect are erased to develop into the reach effect, and the big hit is always notified at the end of the SPSP reach (Fig. 63 (Fig. 63). f) See).

In the present embodiment, the reliability for each number of times the pseudo-continuous production is performed is predetermined to increase in the order of 0 times <1 time <2 times <3 times. When the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or the variation pattern for reachless loss with a variation time of 13.5 seconds is selected, it is possible to execute a small number of pseudo-continuous effects (for example, once). Therefore, when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is small (for example, 0 times or 1 time), the normal reach, the character SP reach, and the SPSP reach can be executed, and the decorative symbol becomes the first mode following the pre-reach effect. There are cases where it becomes the second aspect and cases where it becomes the second aspect.

Further, when the fluctuation patterns D, E, I, and J are selected, a large number of pseudo-continuous effects (for example, twice) can be executed, and when the fluctuation patterns D and E are selected, a larger number of times can be executed. It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous production (for example, three times). Therefore, when the number of pseudo-continuous effects is large (for example, twice), the SPSP reach can be executed, and the decorative symbol tends to be the second mode following the pre-reach effect. It should be noted that SPSP reach may be executed without fail when the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous effect is two or more.

It should be noted that the "full rotation reach effect" in which the decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while maintaining the pattern alignment mode may be executed only when the reach is established after the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times. In the "full rotation reach effect", for example, when the combination of "111" is displayed, the combination of "222" is displayed next, so that the same left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are synchronized. It is a reach effect that scrolls slowly while keeping the pattern matching. The full rotation reach effect is a reach effect that is executed only in the case of a big hit, and is not executed in the case of a loss (reliability 100%). Therefore, the full rotation reach effect can be regarded as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot game will be executed. For example, when variation pattern E is selected, it develops into full rotation reach with or without normal reach with a small probability (eg 1%) and SPSP with the remaining probability (99% in this case). It may develop into reach.

The full rotation reach may be executed using only the decorative symbol of the first aspect, may be executed using only the decorative symbol of the second aspect, or the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the second aspect. It may be carried out by using the decorative pattern of the aspect. For example, in the full rotation reach, the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed at the beginning, the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed in the middle, and the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed at the end. Further, for example, in the full rotation reach, the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed at the start, and the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed from the middle.

It should be noted that the normal pseudo-ream effect is a pseudo-ream effect that suggests that the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display during execution is relatively low, and the story pseudo-ream effect is a "big hit" in the variable display during execution. It may be a pseudo-continuous production that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of becoming. In other words, the jackpot may be more difficult to execute the pseudo-continuous production than the loss, and the story pseudo-continuous production may be easier to be executed. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous production is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss, and when the story pseudo-continuous production is executed, it may be a big hit. Further, for example, when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be easier to execute a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) after the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (always executed). May be).

In addition, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display during execution may be higher in the normal pseudo-continuous production than in the story pseudo-continuous production. In other words, the jackpot may be easier to execute the normal pseudo-continuous production than the loss, and it may be difficult to execute the story pseudo-continuous production. For example, when the normal pseudo-continuous production is executed, it may be a big hit, and when the story pseudo-continuous production is executed, it may be a loss or a big hit. Further, for example, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be easier to execute a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) after the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed (always executed). May be).

Regarding the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed in a plurality of effect modes, there may be different effects depending on the effect mode, that is, the degree of expectation of a big hit and the degree of expectation of shifting to a probabilistic gaming state in the case of a big hit. There is no need for directing. For example, the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect have higher expectations when executed in the normal mode A than when executed in the normal mode B, and the hold icon change effect and the icon change effect are both normal. The above two expectations do not have to change even in the mode.

<Background production>
Next, referring to FIG. 64, in the normal mode A, the fluctuation patterns B to E, G to J, or all the fluctuation patterns for loss without reach (for example, the fluctuation times are 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5). The "background effect" that can be executed when any one of the seconds is selected will be described. The background effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a series of effects when the background effect is executed.

The background effect (see FIGS. 64 (D) and 64 (E)) is an effect executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and is prepared in advance from the state in which the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed. This is an effect of shifting to a state in which the background images of a plurality of types (two types in the present embodiment) are displayed. There are two types of background images after the transition displayed by the background effect: a bird background in which birds are displayed and a night background in which the moon and stars are displayed. The bird background is a background effect in a mode that suggests that the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is relatively low in the variable display during execution. The night background is a background effect that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display during execution, and is a more reliable effect than when the bird background is executed (for example). SPSP reach) is an effect that is easy to be executed afterwards (it may be executed without fail). The night background is more likely to be a big hit than the bird background, and the reliability is 10% and 25%, respectively. Both are images having a wide display area for the entire screen (specifically, an image displayed on the entire screen).

The background effect is one of the reliability suggestion effects performed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect (that is, when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is scrolled at low speed or high speed). The background effect is executed at any of the timings of the start of the variable effect, the restart of the pseudo second station related to the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the restart of the pseudo third station. .. The jackpot expectation and the expectation of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state in the case of a jackpot may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the background effect. For example, the longer the time from the start of the variable effect to the execution of the background effect, the higher (or lower) the above two expectations may be set in advance. Further, for example, the above two expectations may be higher when executed at the start of restarting the pseudo third station than when executed at other timings. It should be noted that when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the night background may be executed more easily than when it is not executed (it may always be the night background).

During the execution of the background effect, the background image related to the background effect is colored by displaying the decorative pattern of the first aspect with high decorativeness instead of the decorative pattern of the second aspect with low decorativeness, and at the start of the variable effect. It is possible to make a gorgeous impression.

For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the background effect at the start of the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 of FIG. 52), and if so, the bird background. Which of the night background and the night background is to be displayed and the display timing are determined by a random number lottery.

For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a background effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines whether or not to execute the background effect by a random number lottery based on the information of whether or not it is a big hit. .. The background effect execution lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not the background effect is executed is predetermined. In the case of a big hit, out of the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 39" is assigned to the judgment result of "execution" of the background effect (execution ratio 40%). A judgment value of "40 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "not executing" the background effect (60% of not executing). On the other hand, in the case of loss, among the judgment values of "0 to 99", the judgment value of "0 to 29" is assigned to the judgment result of "execute" (execution ratio 30%), and "execute". A judgment value of "30 to 99" is assigned to the judgment result of "do not execute" (ratio of not executing 70%).

In this way, since the background effect is more likely to be executed when it is a big hit than when it is lost, the player recognizes that the case where the background effect is executed is more reliable than the case where it is not executed. It is possible. The background effect may be executed if it is a big hit, and may not be executed if it is a loss.

In FIG. 64 (A), in the normal mode A, in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 is determined. An example shows that the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the determination result is lost is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, the first hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 51. The special symbol determination is executed and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, in the normal mode A, the variable display of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIG. 64 (C)). In this example, it is predetermined that the background effect is executed at the start of the variable effect.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, first, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) that has been stopped and displayed moves slightly upward while slightly moving, and then scrolls downward at a low speed. , The effect display that the scroll speed gradually increases is performed.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. In the present embodiment, when the background effect is executed, the operation promotion effect is always started immediately before the start of the background effect. FIG. 64 (C) illustrates a state in which the operation promotion effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect). The operation promotion effect executed during the display of the decorative symbol of the first aspect can be executed in the normal mode A, but cannot be executed in the normal mode B. On the other hand, the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the cut-in while displaying the decorative symbol of the second aspect can be executed in the normal modes A and B.

In the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the normal button image (see FIGS. 64 (C) and 65 (A)) imitating the effect button 26 in the normal state and the effect button 26 in the protruding state are imitated. Any one of the projected button image (see FIG. 65B) is displayed together with the gauge image. The operation promotion effect (weak mode) for displaying the normal button image is an operation promotion effect (for example, reliability 10%) that suggests that the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display during execution is relatively low. The operation promotion effect (strong mode) for displaying the protruding button image is an operation promotion effect that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display during execution (for example, the reliability is 60%). It is a mode in which a highly reliable effect (for example, SPSP reach) is likely to be executed thereafter (may be always executed) as compared with the case where the effect is executed in a weak mode. The operation promotion effect (strong mode) may be executed when it is a big hit, and may not be executed when it is a loss.

As illustrated in FIG. 65 (A), in the operation promotion effect (weak mode), the effect button 26 emits white light in a normal state during a predetermined valid period (for example, 3 seconds from the start of the operation promotion effect). The button lamp, which is a light emitting element built in the effect button 26, is controlled so as to be performed. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 65 (B), in the operation promotion effect (strong mode), the effect button motor and the button lamp are arranged so that the effect button 26 is in a protruding state and emits red light during the effective period. Be controlled. The frame lamp 37 is controlled to be turned off during the valid period.

For example, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 receives the data transmitted from the image / acoustic control board 140 by executing the process of step S44 of FIG. 53, and produces the effect at the timing when the protruding button image is displayed. The accessory motor is operated to change the height of the effect button 26 from the normal state to the protruding state. The effect button 26 can be operated in either a normal state or a protruding state.

When the effect button 26 is operated (for example, pressed) during the valid period, the valid period ends and the normal button image (or protruding button image) and the gauge image are deleted according to the operation, and the background effect is started. .. FIGS. 64 (C) and 64 (D) illustrate how the background image changes to a bird background or a night background when the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is scrolled at a low speed.

If the effect button 26 is not operated during the valid period, the operation promotion effect ends at the end timing of the predetermined valid period, and the background image changes to a bird background or a night background accordingly. When the background effect is executed without being operated, it is easier to shift to the state where the bird background is displayed rather than the night background.

Here, in the present embodiment, the background image related to the background effect is displayed only for the variable effect being executed. The background image related to the background effect is not displayed at the time of character SP reach development, SPSP reach development, or at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at different intervals. For example, when a loss is notified in this variation effect, the default background image (FIG. 64 (A) or (B)) of the normal mode A (or the normal mode B) is displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol. Will be done. The reach development timing and the stop display timing of the first special symbol are both uniquely determined according to the fluctuation pattern and do not change regardless of the presence or absence of operation during the valid period. Therefore, for example, when the operation is performed during the valid period, the display time of the background image related to the background effect is longer than when the operation is not performed during the valid period.

The background effect is an effect that can be executed in the normal mode A, while it is an effect that cannot be executed in the normal mode B. Here, the normal mode B is set during the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and the normal mode A may be entered at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol starts with the variable display of the first special symbol. Even in such a case, the background effect can be executed, and the background effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (flow from FIG. 64 (E) to (B)).

In addition, for example, when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped in the lost mode, the transition from the normal mode B to the normal mode A (or from the normal mode A to the normal mode B) is performed, and the decorative symbol of the first aspect is shifted. May be stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol without changing as it is. That is, the probability that the effect mode shifts from the stop display of the decorative symbol of the first aspect to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first aspect along with the variable display of the first special symbol is 0%. be. In this case, in the variable display in which the background effect is executed, it is possible to control so that the normal mode A is always started at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first aspect. As a result, the flow of the effect when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started can be smoothed, and the effect can be effectively prevented from becoming complicated.

The BGM for the normal mode A may be switched to the BGM for the background effect at the execution timing of the background effect. For example, the bird background BGM may be output from the speaker 24 while the bird background is being displayed, and the night background BGM may be output from the speaker 24 while the night background is being displayed.

<Relationship between the presence or absence of operations during the operation promotion effect and the effect mode executed immediately before the start of the background effect>
With reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the relationship between the presence or absence of an operation during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect and the effect mode of the effect after the operation promotion effect will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect, which is executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of a big hit. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the effect after the operation promotion effect, which is executed immediately before the start of the background effect at the time of loss.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern for loss without reach and the variation patterns B and G are selected, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before that) can be executed in the normal mode A, but the title display ( (See FIGS. 23 and 24) cannot be executed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation patterns C to E and H to J are selected, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before the operation promotion effect) and the title display can be executed in the normal mode A. Therefore, the degree of expectation for the jackpot differs between the case where only the background effect is executed and the case where the background effect and the title display are executed.

The background effect can be executed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, and when the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect, the bird background is more than when it is operated. Although it is easy to shift to, it shifts to one of the backgrounds. In the present embodiment, the player is given a motivation to operate by using such an operation promotion effect and a background effect as a chance to increase the reliability of the title display. The title display is executed by the character SP reach and the SPSP reach, but for convenience of explanation, the title display of the SPSP reach will be described here, and the description of the title display of the character SP reach will be omitted.

In the case of a big hit, the operation promotion effect of the strong mode is more likely to appear than the operation promotion effect of the weak mode as the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. When the effect button 26 is operated during this operation promotion effect, the background effect of the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 of FIG. 52) is executed. In the case of a big hit, the night background is more likely to be displayed than the bird background (it is easier to proceed from FIG. 66 (A) (a) to (c) than (b)).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns D and E are selected and the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the bird background and the night background are displayed. Regardless of which of them is displayed, the title display of the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect is displayed during SPSP reach. Therefore, during the SPSP reach, any one of the blue title display, the red title display, and the rainbow-colored title display can be displayed (FIGS. 66 (A) (b) or (c) to (d). )-(H).

On the other hand, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if it is decided to display the night background at the start of the variable effect, it depends on the end of the valid period. A bird background may be displayed. Therefore, it is more difficult to display the night background when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation (appearance rate of FIGS. 66 (B) (c) <FIG. 66 (A) ( c) Appearance rate). In the case of a big hit, the bird background may be displayed without any operation (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), or the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0). % <Appearance rate of night background <Appearance rate of bird background), night background may be displayed more easily than bird background (appearance rate of night background> appearance rate of bird background> 0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation patterns D and E are selected and there is no operation during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the blue title is displayed or the red title is displayed during the SPSP reach. While the display can be displayed, the rainbow-colored title display is not displayed (the pattern from FIG. 66 (B) (b) or (c) to (d) to (g)). Further, for example, even if it is decided to display the red title display at the start of the variable effect, the blue title display may actually be displayed.

In this way, if there is no operation during the operation promotion effect, the title display other than the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect may be displayed during the SPSP reach, and there is no operation during the operation promotion effect. In the case, it is more difficult to display the red title display than in the case where there is an operation (total appearance rate of FIGS. 66 (B) (e) and (g) <FIGS. 66 (A) (e) and (g). Total appearance rate). In the case of a big hit, the blue title display may always be displayed if there is no operation (the appearance rate of the red title display is 0%), and even if the blue title display is easier to display than the red title display. Good (0% <appearance rate of red title display <appearance rate of blue title display). Further, the red title display may be easier to display than the blue title display (appearance rate of red title display> appearance rate of blue title display> 0%).

In the case of loss, the weak mode is more likely to appear than the strong mode operation promotion effect as the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. When the effect button 26 is operated during this operation promotion effect, the background effect of the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect is executed. In the case of loss, the night background is more difficult to display than the bird background (it is more difficult to proceed from FIG. 67 (a) to (c) than (b)).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected and the effect button 26 is operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the bird background and the night background are displayed. Regardless of which of them is displayed, the title display of the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect is displayed during the SPSP reach. Therefore, either the blue title display or the red title display can be displayed during the SPSP reach (the pattern from FIG. 66 (b) or (c) to (d) to (g)).

On the other hand, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if it is decided to display the night background at the start of the variable effect, it depends on the end of the valid period. A bird background may be displayed. Therefore, it is more difficult to display the night background when there is no operation during the operation promotion effect than when there is an operation. In the case of loss, the bird background may be displayed without any operation (the appearance rate of the night background is 0%), and the bird background may be displayed more easily than the night background (0). % <Appearance rate of night background <Appearance rate of bird background), night background may be displayed more easily than bird background (appearance rate of night background> appearance rate of bird background> 0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation patterns I and J are selected, the effect button 26 is not operated during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect, or the effect button 26 is operated. It is harder to display the red title display than. In the case of loss, the blue title display may always be displayed if there is no operation (the appearance rate of the red title display is 0%), and even if the blue title display is easier to display than the red title display. Good (0% <appearance rate of red title display <appearance rate of blue title display). Further, the red title display may be easier to display than the blue title display (appearance rate of red title display> appearance rate of blue title display> 0%).

In this way, if there is an operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, even if the bird background is displayed according to the operation, the red title display is likely to appear during the SPSP reach. Further, if there is no operation, even if the night background is displayed according to the operation, the blue title display is likely to appear during the SPSP reach. As described above, the presence or absence of the operation at the start of the variable effect affects not only the effect mode of the background effect executed immediately after the operation but also the effect mode during the SPSP reach. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a motivation to operate it, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the player participation type production.

Further, the rainbow-colored title display can be displayed when it is operated, but it is not displayed when it is not operated. This makes it possible to give the player a motivation to actively operate from the start of the variable effect.

Here, if the background effect (or the operation promotion effect immediately before that) is executed in a manner that deterministically announces that the jackpot will be a big hit, it will be found that the jackpot will suddenly start from the start of the variable effect. In this case, even if an effect that enhances the interest of the player by giving anxiety to the player, such as a capture failure effect, is executed, the effect of the effect may not be effectively enhanced. On the other hand, for example, in the middle or final stage of a variable production, if a production related to the subsequent production and the content is executed as a jackpot notice, the player can be given a special feeling and can concentrate on the subsequent production. It is possible. For example, there is a possibility that the effect of the effect can be effectively enhanced by displaying the title indicating the content of the battle effect of SPSP reach as a big hit notice or by setting the cut-in indicating the content of the victory effect as a big hit notice.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the mode that functions as a jackpot notice is not provided in the background effect (and the operation promotion effect immediately before) executed at the start of the variable effect, but is provided in the title display and the cut-in. ing.

In another embodiment, the production mode of the background effect may include a rainbow background that displays a rainbow-colored background image that functions as a jackpot notice, in addition to the bird background and the night background. In addition to the weak mode and the strong mode, the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect includes a rainbow mode in which a rainbow-colored protruding button image that functions as a jackpot notice is displayed. May be good. For example, when the jackpot variation patterns B to E are selected, the background effect of the rainbow background and the operation promotion effect of the rainbow mode can be executed by different random number lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). .. For example, after the operation promotion effect of the rainbow aspect is executed, the background effect of the rainbow background may be difficult to be executed or may be easily executed. Further, after the operation promotion effect other than the rainbow mode is executed, the background effect of the rainbow background may be difficult to be executed or may be easily executed. Further, after the background effect of the rainbow background and / or the operation promotion effect of the rainbow aspect is executed, the rainbow-colored title display may be difficult to be executed or may be easily executed.

Even if there is no operation during the operation promotion effect that is executed immediately before the start of the background effect, the background effect and the title display may be executed in the effect mode determined at the start of the variable effect, or the rainbow-colored title. The display may be displayed.

The reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the combination of the operation promotion effect and the background effect. This makes it possible to get interested in these productions.

For example, any of the following (1) to (4) may be used as the relationship between the high and low reliability of the combination of the operation promotion effect and the background effect.
(1) Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode).
In the above (1), the reliability is high when the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the effect mode of the background effect, and the reliability is low when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed. The relationship between degrees is easy to understand.
(2) Night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode).
In the above (2), there is a case where the relationship of the reliability of the background effect only is opposite. As a result, the display of the bird background may raise expectations as compared with the case where the night background is displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the bird background from being less interesting. In addition, even if the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is started, it is possible to continue the game without losing the sense of expectation.
(3) Bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode).
In the above (3), the reliability is easy to understand because the reliability is high when the night background is displayed and the reliability is low when the bird background is displayed regardless of the production mode of the operation promotion effect.
(4) Bird background after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <bird background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <night background after operation promotion effect (strong mode).
In the above (4), the reliability is the lowest in the downfall, the reliability is medium in the uphill, and the reliability is the highest between the production modes with high reliability, so that the relationship of reliability is easy to understand.
The relationship between high and low reliability related to the combination of the operation promotion effect and the background effect is not limited to the relationship (1) to (4) above, and may be any relationship.

In another embodiment, the operation promotion effect may not be executed immediately before the start of the background effect (appearance rate 0%), or may not be executed (appearance rate 0% or more and less than 100%). .. For example, the background effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first aspect is started (without executing the operation promotion effect) along with the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the combination of the background effect and the title display. As a result, it is possible to make the background effect interesting, and it is possible to effectively enhance the interest when both the background effect and the title display are executed.

For example, the relationship between high and low reliability relating to the combination of the background effect and the title display may be any of the following (1) to (4).
(1) Blue title display after bird background <Red title display after bird background <Blue title display after night background <Red title display after night background.
In the above (1), the relationship of reliability related to the combination of the background effect and the title display is highly reliable when the night background is executed regardless of the effect mode of the title display, and is reliable when the bird background is executed. Since the degree is low, the relationship of reliability is easy to understand.
(2) Red title display after bird background <Blue title display after night background <Red title display after night background <Blue title display after bird background.
In the above (2), the relationship of reliability related to the combination of the background effect and the title display may be opposite to the relationship of the reliability of only the title display. As a result, the display of the blue title may raise expectations more than when the red title is displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the blue title display from becoming less interesting. be. Moreover, even if the bird background is displayed, it is possible to continue the game without losing the sense of expectation.
(3) Blue title display after bird background <Blue title display after night background <Red title display after bird background <Red title display after night background.
In the above (3), the reliability is easy to understand because the reliability is high when the red title display is displayed and the reliability is low when the blue title display is displayed regardless of the effect mode of the background effect.
(4) Blue title display after night background <Blue title display after bird background <Red title display after bird background <Red title display after night background.
In the above (4), the reliability is the lowest in the downfall, the reliability is medium in the uphill, and the reliability is the highest between the production modes with high reliability, so that the relationship of reliability is easy to understand.
The relationship between high and low reliability related to the combination of the background effect and the title display is not limited to the relationship (1) to (4) above, and may be any relationship.

For example, when the variation patterns E and J capable of executing the character SP reach and the SPSP reach are selected, the background effect is executed, and the variation patterns A to D, G to which both the character SP reach and the SPSP reach cannot be executed are executed. When I or the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, it is not necessary to execute the background effect (appearance rate 0%). Further, in the latter case, the appearance rate of the background effect may be lower or higher than that of the former.

Further, the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed during the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect. In such a case, since the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is not superimposed and displayed on the back side of the normal button image (or the protruding button image) and the gauge image, the screen configuration is easy to understand and the operation promotion effect is executed. It is easy for the player to notice that he is there.

For example, the decorative symbol of the first aspect may be displayed during the operation promotion effect (weak aspect), and the decorative symbol of the second aspect may be displayed during the operation promotion effect (strong aspect).

Further, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) executed immediately before the start of the background effect is different from the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the cut-in during SPSP reach, such as "press!" During the valid period. No message is displayed. The effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the start of the background effect may be the same as the effect mode of the operation promotion effect executed during the SPSP reach.

Further, the background effect is an effect in which the effect character 7 is not operated, and is an effect executed when the effect character 7 is in the initial position. In another embodiment, the effecting accessory 7 may be operated at the start timing of the background effect.

In the present embodiment, the background effect is not executed after the start of the reach effect (that is, the appearance rate is 0%). In other embodiments, the background effect may be executable during SPSP reach or during the promotion effect (first half). For example, in SPSP reach, the expectation for a big hit may be higher when the night background is displayed than when the bird background is displayed (it may always be a big hit). In addition, as for the promotion effect (first half), it may be easier to execute the promotion success effect and it may be difficult to execute the promotion failure effect when the night background is displayed rather than the bird background (always the promotion success effect). May be executed).

<Chance eye production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, in normal mode A, variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all reachless loss variation patterns (eg, variation times are 3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5). A "chance eye effect" that can be executed when a pre-judgment result indicating that (any of the seconds) is selected is obtained will be described. The chance eye effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. In the "chance eye effect", the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed with a predetermined combination of specific numbers when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". By doing so, it is an effect that suggests that there may be something that is determined to be a "big hit" in the hold of the first special symbol determination. That is, the chance-eye effect is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggests in advance that a jackpot game may be performed.

At the time of loss, immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped in the same combination as the combination of the numbers that are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started along with the start of the variable display of the next first special symbol, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) that has been stopped and displayed is slightly moved. Is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 74 (B)). Therefore, the chance eye is a predetermined timing (for example, 1 second after the start of the variation display) from immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds before) to the start of the variation display of the next first special symbol. ) Is displayed.

As described above, during the execution of the chance eye effect, the decorative symbol of the first aspect having a large number size is displayed instead of the decorative symbol of the second aspect having a small number size constituting the decorative symbol. This makes it easy to understand that the chance eye is displayed.

There are two types of chance eyes displayed by the chance eye production: weak chance eyes and strong chance eyes. The weak chance eye is a chance eye that suggests that it is relatively unlikely that there is a hold of the first special symbol determination that is determined to be a "big hit". In other words, it is an opportunity to give the player the impression that the variable display of the look-ahead target may be an opportunity. The weak chance eye in the present embodiment is a loose eye composed of three even-numbered symbols (for example, a combination of "8", "4", and "4": see FIG. 74 (A)). If only a weak chance is displayed before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, the reach may be established in the variable display of the look-ahead target, but it is difficult to establish the reach. Further, even if the reach is established by the variable display of the look-ahead target, only the reach effect with low reliability (for example, normal reach) is performed, and in most cases, the loss is notified.

The strong chance eye is a chance eye that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is a thing judged as a "big hit" in the hold of the first special symbol judgment. The strong chance eye in the present embodiment is a loose eye composed of three odd-numbered symbols (for example, a combination of "7", "3", and "3": see FIG. 75 (D)). If a strong chance is displayed before the change display of the look-ahead target starts, the reach is always established during the change display of the look-ahead target, and the reach effect (for example, character SP reach) is performed. That is, the strong chance eye is a chance eye that suggests that the variable display of the look-ahead target develops into, for example, a reach effect higher than the normal reach. Therefore, it can be said that the strong chance eye is an effect having the same function as the blue hold icon described with reference to FIG. 32. When the strong chance is displayed, SPSP reach may be executed during the variable display of the look-ahead target. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the jackpot by displaying the strong chance eye before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts.

In the present embodiment, the chance eyes may be displayed a plurality of times before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts. For example, a weak chance may be displayed in the variation display two before the look-ahead target, and a weak chance may be displayed in the variation display immediately before the look-ahead target. In addition, a weak chance may be displayed in the variation display two before the look-ahead target, and a strong chance may be displayed in the variation display immediately before the look-ahead target. In addition, a strong chance eye may be displayed in the variation display two before the look-ahead target, and a strong chance eye may be displayed in the variation display one before the look-ahead target.

In this way, when the chance eye is displayed multiple times before the change display of the look-ahead target starts, the type of the chance eye displayed in the change display immediately before the look-ahead target is the jackpot of the change display of the look-ahead target. It has a role of suggesting reliability. Therefore, when the weak chance eye is displayed, the player can enjoy the chance eye effect while expecting that the strong chance eye is displayed before the variable display of the look-ahead target starts.

In this embodiment, the case where the chance eye is displayed by using the two fluctuation displays of the first special symbol that are continuously performed will be described, but the look-ahead target is displayed by using the fluctuation display three times or more. The chance eye may be displayed three or more times before the variable display starts.

The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a pre-effect pattern when a hold command is received from the game control board 100 in response to the game ball winning a prize in the first start port 11 (step S136 in FIG. 48). Following, it is decided by a random number lottery whether or not to execute the chance eye production. Then, when it is determined to execute the chance eye effect, the sub CPU 131 determines by a random number lottery what kind of effect pattern the chance eye effect is to be executed.

By the way, the derivation display of the chance eye is performed using the fluctuation of the loss without reach. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the chance eye effect based on the pre-judgment result of the look-ahead target, whether or not all the variation effects related to the change display executed before the change display of the look-ahead target are reachless effects. Is determined, and if there is even one variable effect in which the effect with reach is performed, control is performed such that the chance eye effect is not executed.

It should be noted that whether or not to execute the chance eye effect may be determined by the following processing. Specifically, when a pre-determination result (for example, a pre-determination result indicating a variation pattern capable of executing the reach effect) that can be an execution target of the chance eye effect when the hold command is received is obtained, the sub CPU 131 performs the sub CPU 131. , It is determined whether or not the variation effect related to the variation display executed before the variation display of the look-ahead target includes the one in which the effect with reach is performed. Then, the sub CPU 131 determines that the chance eye effect is not executed when it is determined that the sub CPU 131 is included, and determines that the chance eye effect is executed when it is determined that the sub CPU 131 is not included.

<Design change production>
The chance eye effect is an effect having a function of suggesting the reliability of the jackpot of the look-ahead target. Therefore, it is preferable that the player can easily recognize which chance eye is displayed in the previous variable display even after the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the chance eye mode starts the variable display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing a part (or all) of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) displayed in the chance eye mode, it is suggested that a big hit may be obtained, and the chance eye mode is used. Execute a "design change effect" that suggests that the effect has been executed. Since the symbol change effect is an effect executed by using the decorative symbol of the first aspect, it is an effect of displaying an image having a wide display area with respect to the entire screen.

In the present embodiment, when the chance eye effect is executed, the symbol change effect is also executed. Therefore, the symbol change effect is the same as the chance eye effect, in the normal mode A, the variation patterns B to E, G to J, or all the variation patterns for loss without reach (for example, the variation time is 3 seconds, 8 seconds, And 13.5 seconds) is an effect that can be executed when a preliminary determination result indicating that the selection is obtained is obtained. The symbol change effect is not executed when the variation pattern A is selected. In addition, the symbol change effect is one of the reliability suggestion effects that suggests in advance that a jackpot game may be performed.

FIG. 68 is a time chart for explaining the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect. As illustrated in FIG. 68 (A), when the chance eye effect is not executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol and the decoration associated with the stop display (loss notification) of the first special symbol. The stop display of the symbol (stop display of the loose stitches) will be repeated.

On the other hand, when the chance eye effect is executed, the weak chance eye may be stopped and displayed in the variation effect two before the look-ahead target, and the strong chance eye may be displayed in the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target (). See FIG. 68 (B)). In such a case, at the start of the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target, a symbol change effect suggesting that a weak chance is displayed in the variation effect two before the look-ahead target is executed. Specifically, among the three even-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) forming the weak chance eye, the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols are changed from the default color (for example, blue) to a predetermined color (green in the present embodiment). The effect display that changes all at once is performed.

Further, when a strong chance eye is displayed in the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target, it is suggested that the strong chance eye is displayed in the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target at the start of the variation effect of the look-ahead target. The design change effect is executed. Specifically, among the three odd-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) forming the strong chance eye, the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols are changed from the default color (for example, green) to a color other than the predetermined color (this implementation). In the form, the effect display is changed to red) all at once.

It should be noted that the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are slightly moving during the symbol change effect. The timing at which the decorative symbol changed by the symbol change effect is returned to the default state may be the timing at which scrolling is started, the timing at which the decorative symbol is no longer displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 due to scrolling, or high-speed scrolling.

In this way, when the variable display is started, the look-ahead target may become a big hit by executing the symbol change effect that changes the elements related to the color of the decorative symbol using the decorative symbol, which was stopped and displayed. It is possible to suggest. There are two types of pattern change effects: a mode in which the element related to the color of the decorative pattern is changed to red, and a mode in which the element related to the color of the decorative pattern is changed to green. The mode of changing to red is a symbol change effect of a mode suggesting that it is relatively unlikely that there is something determined to be a "big hit" in the hold of the first special symbol determination. The mode of changing to green is a symbol change effect of a mode suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility that a "big hit" is present in the hold of the first special symbol determination. When the symbol change effect is executed in the mode of changing to red, the reliability of the jackpot of the look-ahead target is higher than when it is executed in the mode of changing to green.

The symbol change effect is executed by using the decorative symbol of the first aspect having a large number size, not the decorative symbol of the second aspect having a small number size constituting the decorative symbol. Thereby, it is possible to easily understand in what kind of effect mode the symbol change effect is executed.

Further, the symbol change effect is executed by using the decorative symbol of the first aspect with high decorativeness instead of the decorative symbol of the second aspect with low decorativeness. As a result, the decorativeness of the decorative symbol of the first aspect, which is originally high, can be further enhanced by the symbol change effect. This makes it possible to give a gorgeous impression at the start of the variable production.

In addition, along with the effect display of the above-mentioned symbol change effect (or instead of the effect display of the above-mentioned symbol change effect), the effect display that changes the color of only the character's clothes attached to the numbers constituting the decorative design. May be done. For example, in the pattern change effect suggesting that the weak chance eyes are displayed, the character's clothes are changed to green all at once, and in the pattern change effect suggesting that the strong chance eyes are displayed, the character's clothes are changed. It may be changed to red all at once.

The chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are effects in which the execution timing is uniquely determined by being linked to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol before the look-ahead target. Therefore, the execution interval when the chance eye effect is executed twice or more is not constant, and the execution interval when the symbol change effect is executed twice or more is not constant. On the other hand, the execution interval between the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect immediately after that is constant no matter how many times these effects are executed.

In other embodiments, the symbol change effect may be executed without executing the chance eye effect. In this case, by executing the symbol change effect using the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) that was stopped and displayed when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". It is possible to suggest that there may be something that is determined to be a "big hit" in the pending first special symbol determination.

Further, in another embodiment, the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect may be configured as one effect. Further, the chance eye effect may be configured as an effect accompanied by an effect display in which the surroundings of the decorative symbol are emitted with a light emitting color corresponding to the strength of the chance eye when the decorative symbol forming the chance eye is stopped and displayed. ..

Further, in another embodiment, there may be a mode in which the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect function as a jackpot notice that deterministically announces that the jackpot will be a jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern B to When E is selected, it may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%).

Further, the chance-eye effect and the symbol change effect are effects in which the effect character 7 is not operated, and is an effect executed when the effect character 7 is in the initial position. In another embodiment, the effecting accessory 7 may not be operated in the chance eye effect, and the effecting object 7 may be operated at the start timing of the symbol change effect.

In the present embodiment, the chance eye effect and the pattern background effect are not executed after the start of the reach effect (that is, both have an appearance rate of 0%). In another embodiment, the chance eye effect and the design background effect may be executed during the SPSP reach, or may be executed during the promotion effect (first half). For example, in SPSP reach, chance eyes may be displayed instead of the reach symbol, and the expectation for a big hit may be higher when the strong chance eyes are displayed than when the weak chance eyes are displayed. Further, for example, in SPSP reach, a symbol change effect of changing the color of the numbers constituting the decorative symbol (reach symbol) from the default color to another color may be executed, and the color of the reach symbol of the even symbol may be changed from the default color to green. The color of the reach symbol of the even-numbered symbol may be changed from the default color to red. Reach symbols can be displayed in default colors, green, and red, and the reliability of jackpots is high in this order. Further, for example, in the promotion effect (first half), a pattern change effect of changing the color of the decorative symbol in the jackpot mode from the default color to another color may be executed, and the color of the decorative symbol in the jackpot mode is different from the default color. The color of (for example, red) has a higher probability of transitioning to the probabilistic gaming state (for example, 100% probability of transitioning).

<Relationship between reliability suggestion effects>
With reference to FIG. 69, the relationship between the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed in the normal mode A will be described. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reliability suggestion effects. As described above, the hold icon change effect, the icon change effect, the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the story pseudo-continuous effect are the trusts that can be executed when the effect is executed in the normal mode A or the normal mode B. It is a suggestion effect. Further, the background effect (and the operation promotion effect), the chance eye effect, and the symbol change effect are reliability suggestion effects that can be executed when the effect is executed in the normal mode A.

When a certain reliability suggestion effect is executed in a highly reliable mode, it is not executed in a highly reliable mode (specifically, when it is executed in a low reliability mode or not even executed). By comparison, a plurality of reliability suggestion effects are likely to be executed in a highly reliable manner, and there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be a big hit. For example, regarding the background effect, when a highly reliable night background is executed, the following can be said as compared with the case where a low reliability bird background is executed.
-Before the start of the variable display in which the night background is executed, the hold icon tends to have a highly reliable color (that is, the hold icon change effect and the pre-effect are likely to be executed in a highly reliable manner (even if they are always executed). good)).
-Before the start of the variable display in which the night background is executed, and in the variable display in which the night background is executed, it is easy to execute the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect for which this variable display is pre-read (may be always executed). ).
-In the variable display in which the night background is executed, other reliability suggestion effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are likely to be executed (may be always executed).
The same applies to the case where the reliability suggestion effect other than the background effect is executed in a highly reliable effect mode. Therefore, in some cases, a situation may occur in which all of these executions are decided.

However, depending on the mode of each effect, it may be perceived as redundant or excessive effect to be executed at the same time. In addition, the amount of image data becomes large, and there is a possibility that processing may be dropped or frames may be dropped due to double buffering.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, prohibition conditions are set in advance between the reliability suggestion effects for the following reasons. In some cases, it stipulates the changes to be made when the prohibition conditions are met.

The relationship between the hold icon change effect and other effects will be described with reference to the line of FIG. 69 (A).

First, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the icon change effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the same effect image as the icon change suggestion image displayed in the icon change effect is used as the hold change suggestion image displayed in the hold icon change effect. For this reason, if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it becomes difficult to understand what is happening, which may give a complicated impression. Further, for example, when the hold icon and the icon change at the same time and the icon changes to a more reliable mode (for example, gold), the expectation for the jackpot is expected for the variation effect corresponding to the icon. Likely to hold. In such a case, if a loss is notified in the variation effect corresponding to the icon, there is a possibility that the hold icon, which is a less reliable mode (for example, green), cannot be expected. Further, for example, when the hold icon changes to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a jackpot), there is a high possibility that the variable effect being executed is not interested.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "the icon change effect" in the row of FIG. 69 (A), it is assumed that the hold icon change effect and the icon change effect cannot be executed at the same time, and the execution of one of the effects is decided. In that case, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. "Control not to execute" means, for example, that when the execution of one effect is decided, the random number lottery process itself for determining whether or not to execute the other effect is not executed. Can be considered.

In another embodiment, the icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the hold icon change effect, or the hold icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the icon change effect. Further, for example, it may be controlled so that the effect related to the one having the higher reliability in the changed aspect is executed and the effect related to the one having the lower reliability in the changed aspect is not executed.

Next, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect will be described.

Regarding the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, for example, when the hold icon changes to a highly reliable mode (for example, a rainbow color indicating a jackpot), you are interested in the change effect being executed. It is likely to disappear. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal pseudo-ream effect is executed, a pseudo-ream effect image of a predetermined color indicating the number of pseudo-reams (for example, green indicating that it is the pseudo-second station) along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen. Is displayed. Since the pseudo-ream effect image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the hold icon, the visibility of the hold icon is reduced. Therefore, even if the hold icon change effect is executed and the color of the hold icon changes during the display of the pseudo-continuous effect image, the effect may not be effectively improved.

Further, regarding the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect, the story pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that draws attention to the story image displayed on the entire screen and the effect sound related to the content of this image. During such an effect, for example, if a hold change suggestion image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the story image, or an effect sound related to the hold icon change effect (for example, an effect sound such as "picon") is output, The player's consciousness shifts to the hold icon. In addition, the production sound related to the story pseudo-continuous production makes it difficult to hear the production sound related to the hold icon change production, and there is a risk that the interest of both productions will be reduced.

Therefore, as shown in the columns of "normal pseudo-ream effect" and "story pseudo-ream effect" in the row of FIG. 69 (A), it is assumed that the hold icon change effect and the normal pseudo-ream effect cannot be executed at the same time, and the hold icon change. It is assumed that the production and the story pseudo-continuous production cannot be performed at the same time.

For example, if the execution timing of the hold icon change effect arrives during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (normal pseudo-continuous effect and story pseudo-continuous effect), the variation effect related to the pseudo-continuous effect ends and the next variation occurs. The execution of the hold icon change effect is carried over until the effect starts. Further, for example, when the execution of the hold icon change effect is decided, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect is reduced, or the pseudo continuous effect is executed at a timing that does not overlap with the execution timing of the hold icon change effect. Be controlled.

In another embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during the execution of the hold icon change effect, or the hold icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the hold icon change effect and the pseudo continuous effect can be executed at the same time when the hold icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), and when the hold icon changes to a color having a lower reliability than the predetermined color. May be controlled not to execute the hold icon change effect. Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or more), the pseudo continuous effect is executed without executing the hold icon change effect, and when it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the hold icon change effect is executed. You may do it.

Next, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, the hold change suggestion image displayed by the hold icon change effect is an image in which the display area is narrow with respect to the entire screen. On the other hand, the bird background and the night background displayed in the background effect are images having a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the entire screen.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69 (A), the hold icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed while the hold icon change effect is being executed, and the hold icon change effect can be executed while the background effect is being executed.

In another embodiment in which the hold change suggestion image is an image having a wide display area with respect to the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), the hold icon change effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time. good. This is because if the background image is completely (or almost) invisible due to the pending change suggestion image and the background image is changed unknowingly, the production may become complicated as a result. In such a case, for example, when the execution of one effect is determined, control may be performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. Further, for example, when the execution timing of the hold icon change effect arrives during the execution of the background effect, the hold icon change effect is performed until the change effect related to the background effect ends and the next change effect is started. Execution may be carried over.

Further, in another embodiment, when the hold icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the hold icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the color has a lower reliability than the predetermined color. If it changes, the background effect may be executed without executing the hold icon change effect. Also, for example, when the night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the hold icon change effect, and when the bird background is displayed, the hold icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect. May be good.

Next, the relationship between the hold icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) will be described. The hold icon change effect is an effect that draws attention to the hold icon, and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) is an effect that draws attention to the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect). If these two types of effects are executed at the same time, for example, the pending change image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern, so that the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered and the effect may be difficult to understand as a whole. be. In addition, it may be difficult to hear the effect sound related to the hold icon change effect due to the effect sound (for example, the effect sound such as "Zugo") output from the speaker 24 during the execution of the chance eye effect (and the pattern change effect).

Therefore, as shown in the columns of "chance eye effect" and "design change effect" in the row of FIG. 69 (A), the hold icon change effect and these effects cannot be executed at the same time.

In another embodiment, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may be executed during the execution of the hold icon change effect, or the hold icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect). It may be feasible. Further, for example, when the hold icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the hold icon change effect is executed without executing the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect), and the reliability is higher than the predetermined color. When the color changes to a lower color, the chance eye effect (and the pattern change effect) may be executed without executing the hold icon change effect. Further, for example, when the strong chance eye is displayed, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) is executed without executing the hold icon change effect, and when the weak chance eye is displayed, the chance eye effect (and the symbol) is executed. The hold icon change effect may be executed without executing the change effect).

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and other effects will be described with reference to the line of FIG. 69 (B).

First, the relationship between the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect image normally displayed by the pseudo-continuous effect and the icon change suggestion image displayed by the icon change effect are both images in which the display area is narrow with respect to the entire screen. When these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is possible to increase the expectation for the variable effects being executed due to the synergistic effect.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "normal pseudo-continuous effect" in the row of FIG. 69 (B), the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the execution of the icon change effect, and the icon change effect can be executed during the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more) due to the icon change effect, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is usually larger (for example, twice) than when the icon does not change to the predetermined color. It may be easy, or a normal pseudo-continuous production may be always executed.

In another embodiment, the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect may not be executed at the same time. For example, when the execution of one effect is decided, the other effect may be controlled not to be executed at the same timing. Further, for example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), it can be executed at the same time as the icon change effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and when the icon changes to a color having a lower reliability than the predetermined color. The normal pseudo continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. Further, when the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or more), the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change effect is executed. You may perform the production.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous effect will be described. As described above, the story pseudo-continuous production is a production that draws attention to the story image and the production sound related to the content of the image. During such an effect, for example, if an icon change suggestion image is superimposed on the front side of the story image or an effect sound related to the icon change effect (for example, an effect sound such as "Schwa") is output, The player's consciousness deviates to the icon. In addition, the production sound related to the story pseudo-continuous production makes it difficult to hear the production sound related to the icon change production, and there is a possibility that the interest of both productions may be reduced.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "story pseudo-continuous production" in the row of FIG. 69 (B), the icon change effect and the story pseudo-continuous production cannot be executed at the same time. For example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect is executed without executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, and when the icon changes to a color having a lower reliability than the predetermined color. The story pseudo continuous effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. If the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or more), the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and if it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, the icon change effect is executed. You may perform the production.

In another embodiment, the story pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during the execution of the icon change effect, or the icon change effect may be executed during the execution of the story pseudo-continuous effect. For example, if the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), it can be executed at the same time, and if it changes to a color with a lower reliability than the predetermined color, the story pseudo-ream without executing the icon change effect. You may perform the production. Further, when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or more), the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when it is executed less than the predetermined number of times, it can be executed at the same time. May be.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, the icon change suggestion image is an image having a narrow display area, and the bird background and the night background displayed in the background effect are images having a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the entire screen.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69 (B), the icon change effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed during the execution of the icon change effect, and the icon change effect can be executed during the execution of the background effect.

In another embodiment in which the icon change suggestion image is an image having a wide display area with respect to the entire screen (for example, an image displayed on the entire screen), the icon change effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time. good. This is because the icon change suggestion image makes the background image completely (or almost) invisible, and the background image may have changed without any explanation, which may give a rough impression. In such a case, for example, when the icon changes to a predetermined color or more (for example, gold or more), the icon change effect is executed without executing the background effect, and the color changes to a color having a lower reliability than the predetermined color. If this is the case, the background effect may be executed without executing the icon change effect. In addition, when the background effect in which the night background is displayed is executed, the background effect is executed without executing the icon change effect, and when the background effect in which the bird background is displayed is executed, the background effect is executed. The icon change effect may be executed without this.

Next, the relationship between the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, the reach effect is always executed when the icon becomes blue or more. On the other hand, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) is executed by using the variable effect related to the reachless effect. Therefore, the icon change effect is not executed in the variable display before the look-ahead target. When the pre-reading target of the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) corresponds to the icon change effect, the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) can be executed at the same time.

In another embodiment, the icon change effect and the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may not be simultaneously executed or may be executed at the same time in any case.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous production and other productions will be described with reference to the line of FIG. 69 (C).

Regarding the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous production and the story pseudo-continuous production, any one type of pseudo-continuous production can be executed in one variable production. Therefore, there is no situation in which the pseudo-series effect is normally executed in the pseudo-first station and the story pseudo-series effect is executed in the pseudo-second station. In addition, these two types of pseudo-continuous effects are not executed at the same time.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) will be described. The pseudo-ream effect image is an image having a narrow display area with respect to the entire screen, and the background image is an image having a wide display area. Therefore, even if these two types of effects are executed at the same time, it is easy to understand what is happening on the entire screen. In addition, it is possible to raise expectations for the variable production during execution due to the synergistic effect.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69C, the normal pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect are controlled to be executable at the same time. That is, the background effect can be executed during the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect can be executed during the execution of the background effect. For example, when executing the night background, the number of times of executing the normal pseudo-continuous production may be larger (for example, twice) than when executing the bird background without executing the night background, and it is always a normal pseudo. A series of effects may be performed.

Next, the relationship between the normal pseudo-continuous production and the chance eye production (and the design change production) will be described. In the present embodiment, these effects are not executed at the same time because the execution timings are different. This also applies to the relationship between the story pseudo-continuous production and the chance eye production (and the symbol change production) (“chance eye production” and “design change production” in the lines of FIGS. 69 (C) and (D). Column).

In another embodiment, the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may be executed during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (normal pseudo continuous effect and story pseudo continuous effect), or the chance eye effect (and the symbol change effect) may be executed. ) May be executed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous production. Specifically, for example, by making the chance eye function as a pseudo-continuous symbol, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed in response to the pseudo-stopped chance eye, and the pseudo-stopped chance eye may be used. You may perform a symbol change effect.

Next, the relationship between the story pseudo-continuous production and other productions will be described with reference to the line of FIG. 69 (D).

The relationship between the story pseudo-continuous production and the background production (and the operation promotion production executed immediately before the background production) will be described. As described above, both the story image and the background image are images that have a wide display area with respect to the entire screen and are displayed on the entire screen. For example, even if the background image is changed behind the story image, it cannot be visually recognized, so that the background image may have changed without any explanation, which may give a rough impression.

Therefore, as shown in the column of "background effect (operation promotion effect)" in the row of FIG. 69 (D), it is assumed that the story pseudo-continuous effect and the background effect cannot be executed at the same time, and the execution of one of the effects is decided. If so, control is performed so that the other effect is not executed at the same timing. That is, the background effect can be executed when the number of times the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed is small (specifically, 0 times), and the background effect is not executed when the number of times the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed is large (for example, twice). .. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern for non-reach loss whose variation time is shorter than 13.5 seconds is selected, background effect can be executed, and when variation patterns D, I, and J are selected. When the story pseudo-ren is executed twice, it is not necessary to execute the background effect.

In another embodiment, for example, when the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or more), the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the background effect, and is executed less than a predetermined number of times. If so, the background effect may be executed. Also, for example, when the night background is displayed, the background effect is executed without executing the story pseudo-continuous effect, and when the bird background is displayed, the story pseudo-continuous effect is executed without executing the background effect. May be good.

It should be noted that the pseudo-ream effect (normal pseudo-repeated effect and story pseudo-ream) may be executed during normal reach, character SP reach, or SPSP reach, and such pseudo-ream effect and other pseudo-ream effects may be performed. The relationship with the production may be the same as described with reference to the lines of FIGS. 69 (C) and 69 (D). In the following description, the pseudo-ream effect executed during the non-reach effect or the pre-reach effect is referred to as a pre-reach pseudo-ream, and the pseudo-ream effect executed after the reach is established is referred to as a post-reach pseudo-ream.

It should be noted that, although the reach is always established after the pseudo-ream after the reach, there are cases where the reach is established with the same reach symbol before and after the pseudo-ream after the reach, and there are cases where the reach is established with a different reach symbol. For example, there are cases where the reach is established with the even-numbered symbols and then the reach is established with the even-numbered symbols again via the pseudo-reach after the reach, and the latter is more than the former. However, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may be high, or it may be easy to become a big hit. For example, if the reach is established with 7 symbols through the pseudo-continuous production after the reach, a big hit may be made.

For example, the rate at which SPSP reach is executed may differ depending on the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Specifically, during the variable display of the first special symbol, only the pre-reach pseudo-ream is executed, the pre-reach pseudo-ream and the post-reach pseudo-ream are executed, and only the post-reach pseudo-ream is executed. It may be executed, and the rate of development to SPSP reach may be high or low in this order. It should be noted that SPSP reach may be executed whenever the pseudo-ream is executed after the reach.

The reliability of the post-reach pseudo-ren for jackpots may be higher, approximately the same, or lower than the reliability of the pre-reach pseudo-ren. For example, the reliability is relatively low when the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once during the variable display of the first special symbol, but if this pseudo-ream effect is a pseudo-ream after reach, the reliability is very high. (For example, the reliability is 70%), the appearance rate of the post-reach pseudo-ream and the pre-reach pseudo-ream may be predetermined. The SPSP reach may be more easily executed (may be always executed) when the pseudo-continuous production with high reliability is executed.

When the pseudo-ream is performed after the reach during the normal reach, the effect is almost the same as the effect described with reference to FIG. 62, except that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed after the reach is established instead of before the reach is established. Is done. Although detailed description will be omitted, for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol is pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol between the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect). Then, all the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) are restarted, and then the decorative symbols of the first aspect are sure to reach again.

When the pseudo-ream is performed after reach during the character SP reach or SPSP reach, except that the pseudo continuous effect is performed with the decorative symbol of the second aspect displayed instead of the decorative symbol of the first aspect. , An effect having a flow substantially similar to that described with reference to FIG. 62 is performed. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, when the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the second aspect) are pseudo-stopped in the upper left corner of the screen, a pseudo-ream as a middle symbol in the center of the screen. The symbol is pseudo-stopped. Then, from the state in which the reach symbol is displayed, all the decorative symbols in the first aspect are restarted. After that, the reach is always established again with the decorative symbol of the first aspect, and for example, the second aspect is from the state where the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed in the same manner as the effect display described with reference to FIGS. 10 (E) to 10 (G). The decorative pattern of is displayed. It should be noted that, after reach, the reach may be established with the same reach symbol before and after the pseudo-ream, but the reach may be established with different reach symbols.

It should be noted that the post-reach pseudo-ren can be executed during the battle production during the character SP reach and does not have to be executed at other timings, and can be executed during the battle production during the SPSP reach and is executed at other timings. It does not have to be.

Next, the relationship between the background effect (and the operation promotion effect executed immediately before the background effect) and the chance eye effect (and the pattern change effect) will be described with reference to the line of FIG. 69 (E).

The background effect is an effect that draws attention to how the background image changes. If the chance eye is displayed on the front side of the background image, it may be difficult to understand the change in the background image. Therefore, as shown in the columns of "chance eye effect" and "design change effect" in the row of FIG. 69 (E), these effects cannot be executed at the same time. For example, if it is determined that the chance eye effect (and the pattern change effect) is not executed, the background effect can be executed, and in the opposite case, the background image is controlled not to be executed.

Regarding the relationship between the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect, as described above, since the symbol change effect is an effect using the chance eye, these effects can be executed at the same time (“design” in the line of FIG. 69 (F)). "Change production" column). That is, the symbol change effect can be executed during the execution of the chance eye effect, and the chance eye effect can be executed during the execution of the symbol change effect.

[Specific example: Pattern in which background effect and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 70 is a screen view illustrating how the background effect and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 70 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any of the fluctuation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected. At the start of the variable effect, it is determined that the operation promotion effect, the background effect for displaying the bird background, and one normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed during the pre-reach effect.

FIG. 70A shows a determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the result is lost is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is held in blue according to the execution of the hold icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the blue hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Is started. Along with this, variable display of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 70A and 70B). FIG. 70B shows a state in which the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the blue hold is shifted to the area 53 without changing and displayed as the blue icon. Illustrated. In addition, the scroll speed of the decorative symbol of the first aspect in which scrolling is started downward is gradually increasing, and the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is illustrated how it is done.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, the valid period ends and the operation promotion effect ends according to the operation. Then, when the background effect is executed according to the operation, the background image changes to a bird background (see FIG. 70 (C)). FIG. 70C exemplifies a state in which the left symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped in a state where the bird background is displayed by executing the background effect.

After that, when the right symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped while the bird background is displayed and then the pseudo-ream symbol is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the normal pseudo-ream effect is executed (FIG. 70 (D)). reference). Since the specific example of the production mode of the normal pseudo-continuous production has been described above with reference to FIG. 62 (A), the description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 70 (D), the left symbol and the right symbol (both are the decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped while the bird background is displayed, which suggests the execution of the normal pseudo-ream effect. Is illustrated as a pseudo-stop as a medium symbol. In FIG. 70 (E), a character indicating a pseudo-ream number such as "x2" and a pseudo-ream effect image are displayed with the bird background displayed, and the reach is established in the pseudo-ream effect. Is illustrated.

When the reach is established with four symbols in the pseudo second station, for example, it is notified that the reach is established with the establishment of the reach. The fact that the reach has been established means that a white reach line is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the reach symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (see FIG. 70 (E)), or "reach!" The voice of the character (hereinafter, referred to as “reach establishment sound”) is output from the speaker 24 to be notified. These are effects that suggest that the reach effect is started, and that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that in the case where the reach effect is not executed.

If the normal reach is started with the bird background displayed after the reach is established, a loss may be notified at the end of the normal reach while the bird background is displayed (a pattern of proceeding from FIG. 70 (F) to (G)). .. In addition, the bird background is erased at the end of the normal reach and develops into the character SP reach, and the winning is notified at the end of this character SP reach (the pattern of proceeding from FIG. 70 (F) to (H)).

A big hit may be notified at the end of the normal reach (a pattern of proceeding from FIG. 70 (F) to (I)). In FIG. 70 (I), while the bird background is continuously displayed, the effect image related to the pseudo-continuous effect is erased, and the decorative symbol in the jackpot mode (decorative symbol in the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped. The situation is illustrated. Following the example shown in FIG. 70 (I), the bird background is erased, and the first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflection effect are performed in the same manner as the flow described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 (A). It will be executed.

In addition, if the bird background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) the character SP reach, and the winning may be notified at the end of this SPSP reach (Fig. 70 (E)). , (J), (K) in that order).

[Specific example: A pattern in which the icon change effect (big hit notice), background effect, and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 71 is a screen view illustrating how the icon change effect (big hit notice), background effect, and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 71 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any of the fluctuation patterns B to E for jackpot of the first special symbol is selected. At the start of the variable effect, one icon change effect (big hit notice) that changes the icon into a rainbow, an operation promotion effect, a background effect that displays the night background, and one normal pseudo-continuous effect reach. It is assumed that it is decided to be executed during the pre-production.

In FIG. 71 (A), similarly to FIG. 70 (A), in the normal mode A, two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, and the icon displayed in the area 53 is displayed. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is lost is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is held in blue according to the execution of the hold icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the blue hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, variable display of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B)). In FIG. 71B, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is scrolled and displayed while the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the blue hold remains unchanged in the area 53. It is shifted and displayed as the blue icon, exemplifying how the icon change effect is being executed. The icon change effect is executed in a mode of displaying an icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to a rainbow, and functions as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the icon will be a jackpot. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon changes to the rainbow-colored icon that functions as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot will be a jackpot. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, the valid period ends and the operation promotion effect ends according to the operation. Then, when the background effect is executed according to the operation, the background image changes to the night background (see FIG. 71 (C)). In FIG. 71 (C), the rainbow-colored icon (big hit notice) is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed by executing the background effect, and the left symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is displayed. Is illustrated as a pseudo-stop.

After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol while the night background is displayed, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 71 (D)). In FIG. 71 (D), with the night background and the rainbow-colored icon displayed, the left symbol, the right symbol (both are decorative symbols of the first aspect), and the pseudo-continuous symbol are pseudo-stopped. The situation is illustrated. In FIG. 71 (E), a character indicating a pseudo-ream number such as "x2" and a pseudo-ream effect image are displayed with the night background displayed, and the reach is established in the pseudo-ream second station. Is illustrated.

When the reach is established with three symbols in the pseudo second station, for example, the white reach line is superimposed and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with the reach establishment (see FIG. 71 (E)), and the reach establishment sound is a speaker. It is output from 24. If normal reach is started with the night background displayed after the reach is established, the night background will be erased at the end of this normal reach and it will develop into character SP reach, and a big hit may be notified at the end of this character SP reach ( (Pattern from FIG. 71 (F) to (G)).

In addition, a big hit may be notified at the end of the normal reach (a pattern of proceeding from FIG. 71 (F) to (H)). In FIG. 71 (H), while the night background is continuously displayed, the effect image related to the pseudo-continuous effect is erased, and the decorative symbol in the jackpot mode (decorative symbol in the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped. The situation is illustrated.

Further, when the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) the character SP reach, and a big hit is notified at the end of this SPSP reach (FIGS. 71 (E), (I). ), (J).

In this specific example, in any pattern, as in the flow described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 (A), before the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode. The first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflection effect will be executed (see FIGS. 11 and 12 (A)).

In FIG. 71, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is executed during the operation promotion effect, and the advance effect as a jackpot notice (the effect of displaying the icon in rainbow color) is during the background effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the reach. It is being executed during the production to notify the establishment. Therefore, in the flow of FIG. 71, for example, the reach symbol is relatively reliable, as compared with the flow of FIG. 70 in which the jackpot notice is not executed (that is, it may be lost) during these productions. It is easy to become 3 symbols (or 7 symbols), the ratio of executing SPSP reach with high reliability is high, and the ratio of big hits is high (probability of big hits is 100%).

[Specific example: A pattern in which the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 72 is a screen view illustrating how the icon change effect, the background effect, and the normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any of the fluctuation patterns D, E, I, and J of the first special symbol is selected. At the start of the variable effect, one icon change effect that changes the icon to blue, an operation promotion effect, a background effect that displays the night background, and two normal pseudo-continuous effects are performed during the pre-reach effect. It is assumed that it has been decided to be carried out.

FIG. 72 (A) shows a determination of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 53 in a state where two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the result is lost is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

After the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest white hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, variable display of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 72 (A) and 72 (B)). In FIG. 72B, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is scrolled and displayed while the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the white hold remains unchanged in the area 53. It is shifted and displayed as the white icon, exemplifying how the icon change effect is being executed. This icon change effect is executed in a mode of displaying an icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to blue. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends according to the operation, and the background image changes to the night background by executing the background effect (FIG. 72 (FIG. 72). See C)). In FIG. 72 (C), the icon changed to blue is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed due to the execution of the background effect, and the left symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped. The state of doing is illustrated.

After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol while the night background is displayed, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 72 (D)). In FIG. 72 (D), the left symbol, the right symbol (both are the decorative symbols of the first aspect), and the pseudo-continuous symbol are pseudo-stopped while the night background and the blue icon are displayed. Is illustrated.

In the pseudo-second station, when the pseudo-series symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-series effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol, the variation display of the pseudo-third station is started by executing the second pseudo-sequential effect (the pseudo-sequential effect is executed. (See FIG. 72 (E)). In FIG. 72 (E), the left symbol and the right symbol (both are decorative symbols of the first aspect) and the pseudo-ream are displayed in a state where the characters indicating the night background, the pseudo-ream number, and the pseudo-ream effect image are displayed. It is illustrated that the symbol and the symbol are pseudo-stopped.

When the reach is established with 4 symbols in the pseudo 3rd station, for example, the white reach line is superimposed and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with the reach establishment (see FIG. 72 (F)), and the reach establishment sound is a speaker. It is output from 24. In FIG. 72 (F), a red pseudo-ream effect image is displayed along the inside of the peripheral edge of the screen with a night background and characters indicating a pseudo-ream number such as “x3” displayed. , The appearance that the reach was established in the pseudo third station is illustrated.

When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) the character SP reach, and the winner is notified at the end of this SPSP reach (FIGS. 72 (F), (G), A pattern that proceeds in the order of (I) or a pattern that proceeds in the order of (F), (H), (I)).

In the case of a big hit (that is, when the fluctuation patterns D and E are selected), the decorative symbol (first aspect) is a big hit mode as in the flow described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 (A). The first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the second reflection effect are executed before the decorative design) is stopped and displayed.

[Specific example: A pattern in which the icon change effect (big hit notice), background effect, and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 73 is a screen view illustrating how the icon change effect (big hit notice), background effect, and normal pseudo-continuous effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 73 shows a specific example of the effect executed when any of the fluctuation patterns D and E for the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected. At the start of the variable effect, the icon is changed to blue and then to a rainbow twice (big hit notice), operation promotion effect, background effect to display the night background, and two times. It is assumed that the normal pseudo-continuous production is determined to be executed during the pre-reach production.

In FIG. 73 (A), similarly to FIG. 72 (A), in the normal mode A, two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51, and the icon displayed in the area 53 is displayed. An example shows that a loss notification effect is performed in which a decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) indicating that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is lost is stopped and displayed. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold.

After the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest white hold is executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, variable display of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is started (see FIGS. 73 (A) and 73 (B)). In FIG. 73B, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is scrolled and displayed while the default background image of the normal mode A is displayed, and the white hold remains unchanged in the area 53. It is shifted and displayed as the white icon, exemplifying how the icon change effect is being executed. This icon change effect is executed in a mode of displaying an icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to blue. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the white icon changes to the blue icon. In the example shown in FIG. 73B, the normal button image and the gauge image are displayed because the operation promotion effect is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the player operates the effect button 26 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect ends according to the operation, and the background image changes to the night background by executing the background effect (FIG. 73 (FIG. 73). See C)). In FIG. 73 (C), the icon changed to blue is displayed in a state where the night background is displayed due to the execution of the background effect, and the left symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is pseudo-stopped. The state of doing is illustrated. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the icon change effect (big hit notice) for displaying the icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to a rainbow is executed. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon changes to the rainbow-colored icon (big hit notice).

After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol while the night background is displayed, the normal pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 73 (D)). In FIG. 73 (D), with the night background and the rainbow-colored icon (big hit notice) displayed, the left symbol, the right symbol (both are decorative symbols of the first aspect), and the pseudo-continuous symbol are simulated. The state of being stopped is illustrated.

After that, when the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the execution of the normal pseudo-continuous effect is pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol in the pseudo-second station, the variation display of the pseudo-third station is started by executing the second pseudo-continuous effect. (See FIG. 73 (E)). In addition, in FIG. 73 (E), the left symbol and the right symbol (both of the first aspect) are displayed in a state where the night background, the rainbow-colored icon, the character indicating the pseudo-ream number, and the pseudo-ream effect image are displayed. It is illustrated that the decorative symbol) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are pseudo-stopped.

When the reach is established with three symbols in the pseudo third station, for example, the white reach line is superimposed and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) with the reach establishment (see FIG. 73 (F)), and the reach establishment sound is a speaker. It is output from 24. In FIG. 73 (F), the night background, the rainbow-colored icon, the character indicating the pseudo-ream number such as "x3", and the red pseudo-ream effect image are displayed, and the pseudo-third station is displayed. It is illustrated how the reach was established in.

When the night background is erased after the reach is established, it develops into SPSP reach through (or without) the character SP reach, and a big hit is notified at the end of this SPSP reach (FIGS. 73 (F), (G), A pattern that proceeds in the order of (I) or a pattern that proceeds in the order of (F), (H), (I)). Before the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the first reflection effect, the promotion effect, and the promotion effect are the same as in the flow described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 (A). The second reflection effect will be executed.

In FIG. 73, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is executed during the background effect, and the advance effect as a jackpot notice (the effect of displaying the icon in rainbow color) is being performed during the background effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, and the reach is established. Is being executed during the production to notify. Therefore, in the flow of FIG. 73, for example, the reach symbol is relatively reliable, as compared with the flow of FIG. 72 in which the jackpot notice is not executed (that is, it may be lost) during these productions. It is easy to become 3 symbols (or 7 symbols), the ratio of executing SPSP reach with high reliability is high, and the ratio of big hits is high (probability of big hits is 100%).

[Specific example: A pattern in which a chance eye effect and a symbol change effect are executed in normal mode A]
FIG. 74 is a screen view illustrating how the chance eye effect and the symbol change effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 74 shows an effect executed in the normal mode A when a preliminary determination result indicating that any of the fluctuation patterns B to E and G to J of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. Shows a concrete example of. When the display of the hold icon related to the look-ahead target is started, the chance eye effect of displaying the weak chance eye in the variation effect two and one before the look-ahead target and the symbol change effect are executed. It is assumed that it has been decided.

In FIG. 74 (A), two hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 51 in the normal mode A, and three weak chances are formed at the end of the variation effect two before the look-ahead target. An example shows a state in which an even-numbered symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is stopped and displayed and a loss is notified. The earliest hold icon is displayed as white hold, and the hold icon related to the look-ahead target is held in blue according to the execution of the hold icon change effect.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even-numbered symbols forming the weak chance eyes is started, the first special symbol determination immediately before the look-ahead target is executed. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Along with this, the earliest white hold is displayed as the icon without changing as it is, and the blue hold related to the look-ahead target is shifted and displayed on the area 53 side (FIG. 74 (A) and FIG. (B)).

Almost at the same time that the icon and the hold icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, and the numbers constituting the three even symbols that were stopped and displayed in a manner of forming a weak chance are the default colors (the default color ( For example, it changes all at once from blue) to green (see FIG. 74 (B)). During the symbol change effect, the even-numbered symbols forming the weak chance eyes are slightly moving.

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 74 (C), the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) starts scrolling downward, the scroll speed gradually increases, and the scroll is scrolled at high speed. Then, the scroll speed gradually decreases, and for example, the decorative symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. Here, since it is predetermined to display the weak chance eyes in the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target, as illustrated in FIG. 74 (D), the three weak chance eyes are formed. The even-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) are stopped and displayed after being pseudo-stopped.

When a predetermined fixed time elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three even symbols forming the weak chance eyes is started, the first special symbol determination related to the look-ahead target is executed, and the first special symbol of the first special symbol is executed. The variable display is started. Along with this, the blue hold related to the look-ahead target is displayed as the icon without changing as it is (see FIG. 74 (E)).

Almost at the same time that the icon and the hold icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, so that the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols that are slightly moving in a manner of forming a weak chance eye are the default colors (for example, blue). It changes all at once from to green (see FIG. 74 (E)). After that, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the first aspect) is scrolled at high speed and then pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 74 (F)), and after developing into a reach effect, the winning is notified. If it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the start of the variable effect related to the look-ahead target, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the reach effect is developed.

[Specific example: A pattern in which the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A]
FIG. 75 is a screen view illustrating how the chance eye effect, the symbol change effect, and the icon change effect are executed in the normal mode A. FIG. 75 shows a specific example of the effect executed in the normal mode A when a preliminary determination result indicating that any of the fluctuation patterns B to E of the first special symbol is selected is obtained. Shown. When the display of the hold icon related to the look-ahead target is started, the weak chance eye is displayed in the variation effect two before the look-ahead target, and the strong chance eye is displayed in the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target. And, it is assumed that the symbol change effect is executed. In addition, it has been decided that the icon change effect (big hit notice) that changes the icon into a rainbow is executed at the start of the variation effect related to the look-ahead target.

Since the flow from FIGS. 75 (A) to 75 (C) is the same as that in FIGS. 74 (A) to 74 (C), the description thereof is omitted here. As illustrated in FIG. 75 (D), in the variation effect immediately before the look-ahead target, the three odd-numbered symbols (decorative symbols of the first aspect) forming the strong chance eye are stopped and displayed after being pseudo-stopped. NS.

When a predetermined fixed time elapses after the stop display of the first special symbol and the three odd-numbered symbols forming the weak chance eyes is started, the first special symbol determination related to the look-ahead target is executed, and the first special symbol of the first special symbol is executed. The variable display is started. Along with this, the hold icon related to the look-ahead target, which was held in blue in response to the execution of the hold icon change effect, is displayed as the hold icon as it is (FIG. 75 (E)). reference).

Almost at the same time that the icon and the hold icon are shifted and displayed, the symbol change effect is executed, so that the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols that are slightly moving in a manner of forming a strong chance eye are the default colors (for example, green). It changes from to red all at once (see FIG. 75 (E)). In addition, the icon change effect (big hit notice) that displays the icon change suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to a rainbow is executed. In response to the execution of the icon change effect, the blue icon changes to the rainbow-colored icon (big hit notice).

After that, with the rainbow-colored icon displayed, the decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the first aspect) is scrolled at high speed and then pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 75 (F)), and after developing into a reach effect, a big hit is made. Be notified. If it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous effect at the start of the variable effect related to the look-ahead target, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the reach effect is developed.

In FIG. 75, the icon change effect as a jackpot notice is being displayed during the chance eye display and is executed during the symbol change effect. For this reason, in the flow of FIG. 75, for example, three relatively reliable symbols or Reach is likely to be established with 7 symbols, the rate of execution of highly reliable SPSP reach is high, and the rate of big hits is high (probability of big hits is 100%).

[Modified example of SPSP reach mode]
For example, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol of the first aspect or the decorative symbol of the second aspect during the SPSP reach (specifically, during the battle effect). FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an aspect of SPSP reach (battle effect). As illustrated in FIG. 76, two types of production modes of the battle effect in SPSP reach are prepared in advance, and these modes may be different from each other in the mode of the decorative symbol displayed as the reach symbol. Specifically, during the battle effect, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed in the three symbol rows forming the reach in the upper left corner of the screen of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 76 (A)). There is an aspect B (see FIG. 76 (A)) in which the decorative pattern of the second aspect is displayed. At the time of a big hit, the aspect B is more likely to appear than the aspect A, and at the time of loss, the aspect B is less likely to appear than the aspect A. Therefore, the reliability of the jackpot is higher in the aspect B than in the aspect A. The player can enjoy the game while expecting that the battle effect is executed in the mode B. The title display, operation promotion effect, and cut-in during the SPSP reach may be executed when the SPSP reach is the mode B, but may not be executed when the SPSP reach is the mode A. It may be lowered.

For example, when the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 starts the variation effect (for example, following the process of step S1557 of FIG. 52), the variation patterns corresponding to the variation effect started this time are D, E, I, J. If this is the case, it is determined which of the A mode and the B mode the battle effect is to be executed. The sub CPU 131 refers to, for example, a battle effect mode lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and determines the effect mode of the battle effect based on the information on whether or not it is a big hit and the type of the corresponding variation pattern. Determined by random number lottery.

The battle effect mode lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining the effect mode of the battle effect is predetermined. The ratio determined in the aspect B (the number of determination values assigned to the aspect B) is higher in the jackpot than in the loss, and is lower in the order of fluctuation patterns E> D> J> I. Further, the ratio determined in the aspect A is lower in the jackpot than in the loss, and is higher in the order of fluctuation patterns E <D <J <I.

Further, in another embodiment, one of an operation promotion effect of displaying a normal button image (weak mode) and an operation promotion effect of displaying a protruding button image (strong mode) is executed during SPSP reach. It may be (see FIG. 65). When the strong mode has higher reliability for the jackpot than the weak mode, when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed during SPSP reach, the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed. More than this, the blue cut-in may be easily displayed and the red cut-in may be difficult to be displayed, or the blue cut-in may be difficult to be displayed and the red cut-in may be easily displayed.

Specifically, for example, the relationship between the high and low reliability of the combination of the operation promotion effect and the cut-in may be any of the following (1) to (4).
(1) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) ..
In the above (1), the reliability is high when the operation promotion effect (strong mode) is executed regardless of the cut-in effect mode, and the reliability is low when the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is executed. The relationship between degrees is easy to understand.
(2) Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) ..
In (2) above, the relationship of reliability of cut-in only may be opposite. As a result, the display of the blue cut-in may raise expectations more than when the red cut-in is displayed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the blue cut-in from becoming less interesting. be. In addition, even if the operation promotion effect (weak mode) is started, it is possible to continue the game without losing the sense of expectation.
(3) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) ..
In the above (3), the reliability is easy to understand because the reliability is high when the red cut-in is displayed and the reliability is low when the blue cut-in is displayed regardless of the effect mode of the operation promotion effect.
(4) Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) <Blue cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (weak mode) <Red cut-in after operation promotion effect (strong mode) ..
In the above (4), the reliability is the lowest in the downfall, the reliability is medium in the uphill, and the reliability is the highest between the production modes with high reliability, so that the relationship of reliability is easy to understand.
The relationship between the high and low reliability of the combination of the operation promotion effect and the cut-in is not limited to the relationship (1) to (4) above, and may be any relationship.

[Small design]
In another embodiment, the variable display may be started with the variable display of the special symbol, and the “small symbol” which is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbol may be displayed at the lower left of the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, the small symbol is, for example, a symbol in which the decorative symbol of the second aspect is reduced to a size of 1/8, and is composed of three small symbols: a left small symbol, a small and medium-sized symbol, and a right small symbol. ..

The small symbol notifies whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss by the combination of the numbers indicated by the three small symbols that are stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, at the time of a big hit, the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol (and the right symbol) and the middle symbol so as to be a combination for notifying the jackpot, and then the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. At this time, along with the pseudo stop of the medium symbol, the small symbols (left small symbol, medium small symbol, and right small symbol) are pseudo-stopped with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol, and then the combination of the three small symbols is decorated. Stop display with the same combination of numbers as the symbol to notify the jackpot. In addition, at the time of loss, the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol (and the right symbol) and the middle symbol so as to be a combination for notifying the loss (a loose eye or a reach lost eye), and then a combination of three decorative symbols is added. The stop display is displayed as it is without any change. At this time, along with the stop display of the three decorative symbols, the small symbols (left small symbol, small and medium-sized symbol, and right small symbol) are stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols. Therefore, for example, when the state shifts to the customer waiting state, the small symbol is stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are synchronized. Therefore, the small symbol is also a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed, like the decorative symbol.

The small symbols may be displayed in a variable manner by displaying a predetermined combination in order. For example, "1 ・ 3 ・ 5" → "2 ・ 4 ・ 6" → "3 ・ 5 ・ 7" → "4 ・ 6 ・ 8" → ... Such combinations may be displayed in a variable manner, and at the time of a big hit, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed after pseudo-stopping with the same number combination as the decorative symbol, and at the time of loss, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed with a combination different from the decorative symbol. As a result, the number of symbols used as small symbols can be reduced as compared with the decorative symbols, and the data capacity can be reduced.

The decorative symbol and the small symbol are common in that the variable display is started when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the stop display is performed when the special symbol is stopped.

However, the decorative design and the small design differ in the following points. First, the decorative design is usually displayed relatively large in the center of the screen, while the small design is displayed relatively small in the lower left corner of the screen, and the display mode (for example, the shape, etc.) is displayed according to the situation of the variation effect. The size, variable display speed, variable display direction) do not change, and the display position does not change during the variable effect.

For example, along with the variable display of a special symbol, the decorative symbol slowly starts the variable display or moves slightly upward and then starts scrolling downward, whereas the small symbol has a constant speed and a constant direction. Start high-speed fluctuation display. The speed at which the small symbols are variablely displayed may be faster (or slower) than the speed at which the decorative symbols of the first and second aspects scroll at high speed, or may be the same. Further, the speed at which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed may be faster (or slower) than or may be the same.

In addition, as for the decorative symbol, a part of the three rows of decorative symbols may be pseudo-stopped during the variable display of the special symbol. On the other hand, as for the small symbols, a part of the three rows of small symbols does not stop in a pseudo manner. For example, in the decorative symbol, when the reach effect is executed, the right symbol scrolls slowly when the left symbol is pseudo-stopped (for example, the effect display in the reach establishment fanning effect), and the right symbol becomes the left symbol. The same symbol may be pseudo-stopped, and the middle symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped with the same symbol, the middle symbol is variablely displayed in a manner in which the middle symbol is likely to stop due to a reach loss, and then a highly reliable reach effect (for example, SPSP reach). May develop into. Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped at different symbols.

On the other hand, for small symbols, even if the reach establishment fanning effect or reach effect is executed, the speed of variable display does not slow down, and the small and medium-sized symbols do not change and display while the left small symbol and the right small symbol are pseudo-stopped. .. Further, even if the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the left small symbol, the small and medium-sized symbol, and the right small symbol do not stop in a pseudo manner. That is, even when the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped, the three rows of small symbols remain variable and displayed without pseudo-stopping.

Further, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is reduced and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of SPSP reach) to become the decorative symbol of the second aspect. On the other hand, small symbols are not displayed in a reduced size. That is, even when the decorative symbols are reduced, the three rows of small symbols are not displayed in a reduced size but are displayed in a variable size as they are.

Further, the decorative design is used for the first reflection effect, the second reflection effect, and the third reflection effect, but the small design is not used for these effects. Therefore, even when the highlight light is added to the decorative symbol that is pseudo-stopped in the jackpot mode, the highlight light is not added to the small symbol.

Further, as for the decorative symbol, during the variable display of the special symbol, another effect image (for example, a button image) may be superimposed and displayed on the front side, or the effect accessory 7 may be operated toward the front side, so that part or all of the decorative symbol may be displayed. May become invisible. On the other hand, the small symbol is displayed on the front side of the other effect image and is displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized even if the effect accessory 7 is operated, so that part or all of the small symbol is not invisible. For example, when the operation promotion effect is executed, the middle symbol of the three rows of decorative symbols may not be visible, whereas the small symbol of the three rows is not partially invisible and is medium. Even while the symbols are not visible (or hidden), the small and medium-sized symbols remain displayed (variable display). In another embodiment, the small symbol may not be visible when the effecting object 7 is operated.

[Modification example of decorative design]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the normal time loss reach symbol selection table (see FIG. 19 (A)), which is referred to when the determination result of the special symbol determination is a loss, 1 symbol to 6 symbols, 8 It is preset so that the ratio of the symbols and the selection of the nine symbols is equal. Further, in the reach symbol selection table for loss at the time of probability change (see FIG. 20 (A)), the ratio of selecting decorative symbols other than the three symbols, the five symbols, and the seven symbols is set in advance so as to be equal. As a result, it was possible to provide a function of suggesting the reliability of the jackpot for the types of numbers constituting the decorative pattern, which of the numbers 1 to 9 is.

However, it was not difficult for all odd-numbered symbols to be selected at the time of loss than even-numbered symbols. Therefore, regardless of the type of numbers, the default color of the numbers that make up the odd-numbered symbols is green, and the default color of the numbers that make up the even-numbered symbols is blue, but this decorative symbol (specifically, the numbers). It was not possible to give the element related to the color of the game a function that suggests the reliability of the jackpot.

Therefore, in order to have a function of suggesting reliability for the elements related to the color of the decorative symbol, the reach symbol selection table for loss during normal operation and the reach symbol selection table for loss during probability change (FIGS. 19 (A) and 20 (A)). ) May be set in advance so that the even-numbered symbols have a higher selection ratio than the odd-numbered symbols.

Specifically, for example, in the reach symbol selection table for normal loss, 9 random numbers for 1 symbol, 5 symbols, and 9 symbols among the reach symbol selection random numbers of "0" to "99". , 7 random numbers are assigned to 3 symbols, and 6 random numbers are assigned to 7 symbols. In addition, 15 random values are assigned to each of 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols.

Further, for example, in the reach symbol selection table for loss at the time of probability change, for example, among the reach symbol selection random numbers of "0" to "99", 5 symbols for 1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, and 9 symbols, respectively. A random number value is assigned to each of the 7 symbols and 0 random number value is assigned. In addition, 20 random values are assigned to each of 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols.

By adopting the reach symbol selection table for loss as described above, it is possible to make a big hit more easily when the reach is established with odd-numbered symbols than when the reach is established with even-numbered symbols. As a result, it is possible to have a function of suggesting the reliability of the jackpot for the element related to the color of the decorative pattern (specifically, the number). If the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is 16R probability variation, even-numbered symbols and odd-numbered symbols may be selected as the reach symbols, while the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is 6R normal. Odd symbols are not selected (see FIGS. 19B and 19C, 20B and C). Therefore, it is possible to provide a function of suggesting the reliability of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state for the elements related to the color of the decorative pattern. That is, for example, in the SPSP reach, when an odd number symbol of a predetermined color (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed, a jackpot expectation degree is obtained when an even number symbol other than the predetermined color (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed. It can be said that there is a high degree of expectation that the game will shift to a probabilistic game state. If the reach symbol is an even number symbol, it may be a loss or a big hit, and if the reach symbol is an odd number symbol, it may be a big hit.

It should be noted that the reach symbol selection table for loss may be configured as described above, and even-numbered symbols may be set in advance so that even-numbered symbols are more easily displayed than odd-numbered symbols, even if the stitches are stopped and displayed in order to notify the loss. .. Specifically, for example, in order to determine the looseness in the process of step S1540 of FIG. 51, the even-numbered symbols are configured to be more easily determined as the decorative symbols forming the looseness than all the odd-numbered symbols. You may refer to the table. It should be noted that all the decorative symbols forming the loose stitches may be even-numbered symbols, and among the loose stitches, a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) is an odd-numbered symbol and other decorative symbols (for example, the right symbol) are even-numbered symbols. But it may be.

The default color of the numbers constituting the decorative pattern (elements related to the color of the decorative pattern) is not limited to the above-mentioned color, and may be any color. For example, the color of the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols may be red, and the color of the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols may be purple.

Further, the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols and the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols may have different colors, and the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols may have a plurality of colors, or the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols may have a plurality of colors. .. Specifically, among the odd-numbered symbols, when the color of the number "7" constituting the 7 symbols is red and the color of the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols other than the 7 symbols is green, the even-numbered symbols are configured. The color of the numbers to be played may be blue (ie, a color other than red and green).

It should be noted that a plurality of types of colors may be associated with one number constituting each decorative pattern. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the colors of the numbers that make up each decorative pattern, and in this order, the reliability for the jackpot and the reliability for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state. (That is, the degree of expectation that the game does not shift to the time-saving game state) may be set in advance. For example, the reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd symbol than when the reach symbol is a white even symbol, and further, the reliability is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd symbol. (The jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the color of the decorative pattern.

Further, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for one number constituting each decorative pattern. For example, the character that is the additional display is different for each number that constitutes the decorative pattern, and a plurality of characters may be associated with each number as the additional display. Specifically, the characters A to C, which are additional displays of the seven symbols, may not be the additional display of decorative symbols indicating other numbers. For example, the reliability for the jackpot and the reliability for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the expectation for not shifting to the time-saving gaming state) may be set in advance in the order of the characters A to C. For example, the reliability is higher when the reach is established by the decorative symbol of the first aspect to which the character A is added than when the reach is established by the decorative symbol of the first aspect to which the character B is added. The reliability is higher when the reach is established by the decorative symbol of the first aspect to which the character C is added (the jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the additional display of the decorative pattern. As additional displays, a plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the symbols 1 to 9 may be prepared in advance. For example, characters A to C are prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the symbols 1 to 9. You may.

With reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, modified examples of the decorative symbols of the first aspect and the second aspect will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the additional display displayed by being added to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the second aspect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is composed of a number and a character which is an additional display corresponding to the number, and the decorative symbol of the second aspect is composed of a number without an additional display. It is composed. In the modified example described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, regardless of the mode of the decorative symbol, any one of the additional images A to C, which is an effect image different from the character, is the decorative symbol. Is always added to the numbers that make up. The additional images A to C are additional displays superimposed on the back side of the numbers constituting the decorative symbols in both the first and second decorative symbols.

Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the character, which is another additional display even on the back side of the numbers (FIG. 78 (A)). Further, in the decorative pattern of the second aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the number (see FIG. 78 (B)).

The additional images A to C move or do not move in the same manner as the character that is the additional display. Specifically, the additional images A to C are, for example, when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is pseudo-stopped and when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is changed to the decorative symbol of the second aspect (and). In the opposite case), it fluctuates in synchronization with the fine movement of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern. Further, when scrolling, the additional images A to C do not fluctuate regardless of the speed. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, and the additional images A to C do not move at all and become a still image like the character which is the additional display. In another embodiment, while the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are still images during the stop display of the special symbol, the additional images A to C may fluctuate.

The additional image A is an ocher image, and is an additional display corresponding to odd-numbered symbols other than the seven symbols (see FIG. 77 (A)). The additional image B is a silver image having the same pattern as the additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to even-numbered symbols (see FIG. 77 (B)). Further, the additional display C is a golden image having a pattern different from that of the additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to the seven symbols.

Since the type of the additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative pattern, it is possible to determine whether the number constituting the decorative pattern is an odd number, an even number, or "7" depending on the type of the additional image. As a result, for example, the element related to the color of the decorative symbol is blue compared to the case where the element related to the color of the decorative symbol (specifically, the number) is green and the additional image A (that is, an odd number symbol other than the 7 symbols). It can be suggested that the case of the additional image B (that is, even-numbered symbols) has higher reliability for the jackpot and higher reliability for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state. Further, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative symbol is green and the additional image C (that is, 7 symbols), the reliability for the jackpot and the transition to the probabilistic gaming state are higher than in the case of other combinations. It can be suggested that the reliability is high.

Since the additional indications A to C are attached to the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the decorative symbol of the second aspect, they are always displayed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. In the normal modes A and B (during the normal gaming state) and the probabilistic mode A and B (during the probabilistic gaming state), the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are the same, and the additional images A to C can be displayed. be. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity to these different production modes.

The additional image A and the additional image B may be images of different colors, or may be an image in which a part is the same and the other part is different.

Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number constituting the decorative pattern. For example, when the additional image A or the additional image C is added to one number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to add the additional image C, and the lower the reliability, the easier it is to add the additional image A. good. The additional image C may be added when it is a big hit, but may not be added when it is a loss.

[Variation example of reliability suggestion effect]
In another embodiment, the following effects may be executed as the reliability suggestion effects that can be executed during the display of the decorative symbol of the first aspect.

For example, instead of the background effect, a dialogue effect suggesting the reliability of the jackpot may be executed by displaying a dialogue image representing the dialogue of this character together with a predetermined character. The dialogue production includes weak dialogue, strong dialogue, and rainbow dialogue that functions as a jackpot notice that definitively announces that the jackpot will be a big hit, and the reliability of the jackpot is high in this order. For example, depending on the operation during the operation promotion effect, a weak line may be executed instead of the bird background, a strong line may be executed instead of the night background, and a rainbow line may be executed in the case of a big hit. The serif effect is different from the background effect of displaying a background image having a wide display area in that a serif image having a narrow display area for the entire screen is displayed.

Further, for example, instead of the background effect, a step-up effect is executed in which a predetermined upper limit number of steps (for example, 4) is set as the upper limit, and the step-up effect is gradually developed to any step equal to or less than the upper limit number of steps. May be good. In the step-up effect, for example, by sequentially switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance, the effect display is performed so that the effect mode changes in a plurality of stages. The step-up effect is an effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot depending on the number of steps the effect develops. The case of developing to many steps (for example, 3) is more reliable than the case of developing to only few steps (for example, 1), and the step-up effect of developing to the upper limit function functions as a jackpot notice. For example, a step-up effect may be executed instead of the background effect according to the operation during the operation promotion effect. The step-up effect is different from the background effect of displaying a background image having a wide display area in that an effect image having a narrow display area is displayed.

For example, the normal pseudo-continuous effect may be executed only in the normal mode A, and the story pseudo-continuous effect may be executed only in the normal mode B. Further, the pseudo continuous effect, the chance eye effect, and the design background effect may be executed only in the normal mode A, or may be executed only in the normal mode B. Further, the operation promotion effect (weak mode) can be executed in the normal modes A and B, while the operation promotion effect (strong mode) may be executed only in the normal mode A.

Further, the execution ratios of all the reliability suggestion effects may be different depending on the value of the set value related to the jackpot probability, or the execution ratios of some reliability suggestion effects (for example, only the background effect) may be different. May be good. For example, the execution rate of the predetermined reliability suggestion effect may be higher (or lower) in the order in which the set values are “1” to “3”. As an example, if the set value is "3", the background effect can be executed in the normal mode A, and if the set value is "2" or "1", the background effect is not executed even in the normal mode A (). That is, the appearance rate (0%) may suggest that the set value is set to "3" by executing the background effect.

As another embodiment, a part of the processing executed on the image / sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150) may be executed by the effect control board 130, or a process executed on the effect control board 130. A part may be executed by the image / sound control board 140 (or the lamp control board 150). Further, the effect control board 130, the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 are integrally configured, and the process executed on the effect control board 130, the process executed on the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150. The processing executed in the above may be executed by one control board.

Moreover, the above-described embodiments are applicable to each other. For example, the present invention may be realized by a configuration in which the first embodiment, the modified example of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment are combined.

Further, it goes without saying that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The explanatory diagrams and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other embodiments.

Further, the above-mentioned effect is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications are applicable to each other, and the present invention may be realized in various combinations.

[Structure and Action / Effect of Pachinko Gaming Machine According to the Present Invention]
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may have the following configuration.

The gaming machine (for example, 1) according to the embodiment determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. It ’s a machine,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
A corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is displayed, and the display is performed.
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to such a configuration, the corresponding display is a normal mode or a special mode in the common effect, whereas the advance notice effect can be appropriately executed depending on which mode the advance notice effect is. Thereby, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect so as to be effectively conspicuous. In addition, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness from occurring when the display of the corresponding display and the execution of the advance notice effect are executed at the same time.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A selection means (for example, 100) for selecting the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern based on the result of the determination.
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
A corresponding display (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is displayed, and the display is performed.
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect can be executed.
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed.
If it is determined that the special game is to be executed,
The second variation pattern is easier to select than the first variation pattern.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate advance notice effect according to the type of fluctuation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the execution of an effect that is perceived as redundant or excessive. In addition, when the special game is executed, more notice effects can be executed than when the special game is not executed, so that it is possible to realize a highly interesting effect while the corresponding display is displayed.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
The first notice effect can be executed before the start of the common effect.
After the start of the common effect, the second notice effect can be executed.

According to such a configuration, different effects can be executed before and after the common effect. As a result, it is possible to realize a mellow effect.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
The first notice effect can be executed before the start of the common effect.
After the start of the common effect, the second notice effect can be executed.
The first notice effect is less likely to be executed after the start of the common effect than before the start of the common effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effectability different before and after the common effect, and it can be expected that the first notice effect after the start of the common effect is executed.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
After executing a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode, a specific effect (for example, promotion effect) for displaying the corresponding display in a specific mode (for example, a jackpot mode). Is possible and
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on which of the plurality of timings the common effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the common effect is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the effect until the common effect is started.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
After executing a common effect (for example, reach effect) that can display the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode, a specific effect (for example, promotion effect) for displaying the corresponding display in a specific mode (for example, a jackpot mode). Is possible and
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display in the common effect is the special mode.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of corresponding display is displayed in the common production, so that it is possible to pay attention to the production during the common production.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
It is possible to execute the production in any of a plurality of production modes including the first production mode and the second production mode.
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
It is controlled to the first effect mode (for example, normal mode A), and the corresponding display is either a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect) or a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second aspect). On the other hand, the first notice effect (for example, background effect) that is executed when there is one,
A second notice effect (for example, a title) that is controlled to the first effect mode or the second effect mode (for example, normal mode B) and is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display is different from that during the first notice effect. Display), and there are
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to this configuration, the type of advance notice effect can be different or the same depending on the type of effect mode, so that the effect is different for each effect mode, but a sense of unity is given to the entire effect executed by the gaming machine. It is possible to issue.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern based on the result of the determination.
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect can be executed.
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect is not executed.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern based on the result of the determination.
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
When the first fluctuation pattern is selected, the second notice effect is not executed, and the second notice effect is not executed.
When the second variation pattern is selected, the second notice effect can be executed.

According to the above two configurations, it is possible to execute an appropriate advance notice effect according to the type of fluctuation pattern. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the execution of an effect that is perceived as redundant or excessive.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
A second notice effect (for example, title display) executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode), and
There is a third notice effect (for example, hold icon change effect),
The third notice effect can be executed during the execution of the first notice effect.
During the execution of the second notice effect, the third notice effect is not executed,
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.

According to such a configuration, since the third notice effect is not executed during the execution of the second notice effect, it is possible to effectively prevent the third notice effect from deteriorating the interest of the second notice effect.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
The production mode of the first notice effect includes a first mode (for example, a bird background) and a second mode (for example, a night background).
There are a third mode (for example, a blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, a red title display) as the production mode of the second notice effect.
When the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed,
The degree of expectation that the special game is executed differs depending on the combination of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the advance notice effect to be executed and the effect mode thereof, and it is possible to draw attention to the player regardless of whether the corresponding display is the normal mode or the special mode. It is possible.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Along with the variable display of the identification information, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display is variablely displayed.
Along with the derivation display of the result of the determination, the corresponding display is stopped and displayed.
From the start of the variation display of the corresponding display to the stop display, it is possible to execute a re-variation effect (for example, a story pseudo-continuous effect) in which the corresponding display is temporarily stopped and then changed again. It is possible and
It is possible to execute an effect suggesting the possibility that the special game is executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the production that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed,
A first effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
When the number of times of the re-variation effect is small (for example, once), the first effect and the second effect can be executed.
When the number of times of the re-variation effect is large (for example, twice), the second effect can be executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a notice effect that is not executed according to the number of times of the re-variation effect, but in such a case, the number of times of the re-variation effect is large, so that it is difficult for the player to get bored.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) includes an input means that can be input by the player.
A gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination.
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
When the corresponding display is the normal mode (for example, the decorative symbol of the first mode), the first notice effect (for example, the background effect) that can be executed in response to the input to the input means,
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
The production mode of the first notice effect includes a first mode (for example, a bird background) and a second mode (for example, a night background).
There are a third mode (for example, a blue title display) and a fourth mode (for example, a red title display) as the production mode of the second notice effect.
When the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed,
The degree of expectation that the special game is executed differs depending on the combination of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

According to such a configuration, not only can the advance notice effect itself have an expectation degree, but also the expectation degree can be made different by combining a plurality of advance notice effects. Thereby, it is possible to be interested not only in the notice effect alone but also in a plurality of types of the notice effect when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and in the special mode.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is advantageous to the player because it determines whether or not to execute the special game, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game).
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
The corresponding display is
The first element related to color (for example, the color of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern),
A second element (for example, an additional image) to be added to the first element is included.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the element of the corresponding display.

According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the corresponding display, and as a result, the player pays attention to the advance notice effect when the corresponding display is in the normal mode and when the corresponding display is in the special mode. It is possible to attract.

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is advantageous to the player because it determines whether or not to execute the special game, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, 6R normal) or a second advantageous state (for example, 16R probability variation) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
The corresponding display is
The first element related to color (for example, the color of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern),
A second element (for example, an additional image) to be added to the first element is included.
When the first element and the second element are in a specific mode (for example, the numbers constituting the decorative pattern are red and the additional image C), the second advantageous state is obtained as compared with the case where the first element and the second element are not in the specific mode. Easy to control.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the player with respect to the corresponding display, and it is possible to give a special feeling to the player when the element of the corresponding display is a specific aspect.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
A suggestion effect suggesting that the special game is executed (for example, the icon change effect that changes the icon to a rainbow color) and
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
A first notice effect (for example, a background effect) executed when the corresponding display is a normal mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, a decorative symbol of the second mode).
After the first notice effect, it is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) capable of displaying the corresponding display in the normal mode or the special mode.
When the suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first notice effect, and when the suggestion effect is executed.
In the case where the suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the first notice effect,
In the common effect, the proportion of the corresponding display displayed in the special mode is different.

According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect may be executed during the execution of the first notice effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention during the first notice effect. Further, since the common effect is executed after the first notice effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the common effect following the first notice effect.

Further, the gaming machine (for example, 1) is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, displays the identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination. hand,
A production control means (for example, 130) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game is executed at any one of a plurality of timings and a target effect (for example, a pre-effect).
For the advance notice production
The first notice effect (for example, the hold icon change effect) executed when the corresponding display is the normal mode (for example, the decorative symbol of the first aspect), and
There is a second notice effect (for example, title display) that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode (for example, the icon change effect).
It is possible to execute a common effect (for example, reach effect) in which the corresponding display can be displayed in the normal mode or the special mode.
When the target effect is the first effect mode (for example, blue) in response to the execution of the first notice effect, the ratio of the target effect to the second effect mode (for example, rainbow color) is the first ratio. And
When the target effect is the first effect mode in response to the execution of the second notice effect, the ratio of the target effect to the second effect mode is the second ratio (for example, the first ratio). Higher percentage).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether the target effect is changed to the first aspect by the first advance notice effect or the first aspect by the second notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's attention regardless of whether the corresponding display is in the normal mode or the special mode.

1 Gaming machine 5 Liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal screen)
7 Directing accessory 13 Grand prize opening 24 Speaker 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 sub ROM
133 sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image acoustic control board 141 General CPU
142 Control ROM
143 Control RAM
144 VDP
145 Acoustic DSP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to a player, displays identifiable identification information in a variable manner, and then derives and displays the result of the determination.
A pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made, and
A selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the identification information from a plurality of types of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern based on the result of the determination.
Equipped with a production control means to control the production
The effect control means
The pre-effect can be executed based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.
Display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information,
It is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
For the advance notice production
The first notice effect executed when the corresponding display is in the normal mode, and
There is a second notice effect that is executed when the corresponding display is a special mode.
When the first variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect can be executed.
When the second variation pattern is selected, the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed.
If it is determined that the special game is to be executed,
The second fluctuation pattern is easier to select than the first fluctuation pattern.
A gaming machine in which the advance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the advance effect is executed than when the advance effect is not executed.

Images